Class P/?z;// 
 
 Bonk /T ^ 
 Copyright If 
 
 COPYRIGHT DEPOSIT. 
 
A 
 Child's 
 
 Illustrated 
 
 OF t-O/S^S 
 
 'o.JMlA 
 
 BT ^ 
 
 PROF. JEAN GUSTAVE KEETELS, 
 
 AUTHOR OF " ANALYTICAL AND PRACTICAL FRENCH GRAMMAR, 1 
 "ELEMEXTAUT FRENCH GRAMMAR," ETC., ETC., ETC. 
 
 A NEW EDITION, REVISED AND ENLARGED. 
 NEW YORK: 
 
 CLARK & MAYNARD, PUBLISHERS, 
 
 Xo. 5 Barclay Street. 
 
 1880. 
 
 Hi 
 
r- 
 
 
 Prof. Keetels' French Series. 
 
 1. A Child's Illustrated First Book in French. 
 
 144 pages, 12mo, handsomely bound in cloth. Newly revised. 
 
 The aim of this book is to make the Study of the French language attractive 
 and interesting to children, who have no knowledge of the English grammar. 
 The object-lesson plan has been adopted. For this purpose, the volume is hand- 
 somely illustrated by engravings especially prepared for the book. 
 
 2. An Elementary French Grammar. 264 pages, i2mo. 
 
 This work is designed for students of the grammar department. Its purpose is 
 xo train them in the principles of French grammar, and to accustom them by oral 
 instruction to the use of the French language. 
 
 3. An Analytical and Practical French Grammar. 
 
 524 pages, 12mo. 
 
 This book, containing the advantage of the oral and the analytical method of 
 instruction, comprises all that is necessary to teach the French language eucces- 
 ful!y, both theoretically and practically. It is a complete grammar, in which the 
 principles of the language are developed in a logical and efficient manner. 
 
 4. A Key to the English Exercises in the Analytical 
 and Practical French Grammar. i2mo. cioth. 75 cents. 
 
 5. A Collegiate Course in the French Language, 
 
 comprising a complete Grammar, in two parts. Arranged and prepared for the 
 Study of French in Colleges and Collegiate Institutions. Part First : A Treatise 
 on French Pronunciation ; Rules on Gender ; Etymology ; Exercises for Transla- 
 tion; the Latin Elements common to both the French and the English. Part 
 Second: Syntax; a Collection of Idioms; Exercises for Translation, and Voca- 
 bulary. 
 
 6. A Key to the English Exercises, in Part Second of 
 
 A Collegiate Course in the French Language. (For Teachers only.) 
 
 7. An Analytical French Reader ; with English Exercises 
 
 for Translation and Oral Exercises for Practice in Speaking ; Questions on Gram- 
 mar, with References to the Author's several Grammars. Notes and Vocabulary. 
 In Two Parts. Part First : Selections of Fables, Anecdotes, and Short Stories. 
 Part Second : Selections from the best Mo<?ern Writers. 3iX) pages, ldno. For 
 introduction, £1, 
 
 Copvbioht, 1879, Br Clark & Mat.nakb. 
 
PEEFACE. 
 
 This volume takes its appropriate place, as A Child's 
 First Book in French, by the side of my Elementary French 
 Grammar, and my Analytical and Practical French Gram- 
 mar. The three works are not necessarily connected; each 
 takes up the subject at its first principles, but in each a dif- 
 ferent mode of instruction is adopted, suited to the different 
 as:es of the scholars for whom the books are written. 
 
 The present work is intended for children who can read, 
 but who have not yet any knowledge of the grammar of 
 their own language. For this class of scholars object-teach- 
 ing seems the most suitable ; that is, connecting the instruc- 
 tion with an object presented to the eye. This mode has 
 been generally followed in the lessons in this book. Pictures 
 have been prepared for the purpose, and the lessons, in Part 
 First, directly refer to the objects in the pictures. Each 
 lesson is headed by a name, which, in connection with the 
 illustration, helps to impress the subject-matter of the les- 
 son iipon the mind, enables the student to recall it more 
 readily, and creates a more lively interest. 
 
 In Part Second, the lessons refer to the illustrations in 
 Part First, recall the name of each picture, enlarge upon 
 the subject, and, by associating new ideas with it, keep alive 
 the interest. 
 
 The English is given in all the reading lessons, word for 
 word, underneath the French, so that the students may 
 know the meaning of each word which they pronounce, 
 without referring to the vocabularies. This plan possesses. 
 
4 PREFACE. 
 
 besides, the advantage of showing the difference in the con- 
 struction of the two languages. A correct English version 
 of the French exercises follows in Part Third. 
 
 Finally, Part Fourth contains a glance at the parts of 
 speech, with paradigms of the auxiliary verbs and of the 
 four regular conjugations, as an introduction to the study 
 of grammar. 
 
 The lessons are progressive. Beginning with the simple 
 elements, they gradually advance, and develop, in a practical 
 course, the first principles, which are the groundwork of 
 grammar. 
 
 It may perhaps be urged as an objection that the develop- 
 ment is too rapid, and that the lessons towards the end of 
 Part Second are too complicated. This ground of objection 
 is more apparent than real. The book contains matter for 
 a two' years' course of instruction, which may even be ex- 
 tended beyond that period. Students who enter upon the 
 course at nine or ten years of age, will not have completed 
 it before they are twelve or thirteen. The average intellect 
 of that age can understand all the English in the exercises, 
 and hence can acquire a practical knowledge of the same in 
 French. 
 
 The favor with which my former works of this series have 
 been received by eminent teachers in New York and other 
 cities, and by an appreciative public in general, leads me to 
 believe that this volume will meet with a kind reception, 
 and will readily secure for itself a careful inspection. My 
 thanks are due in advance to all who, after a thorough 
 examination of it, will express a candid criticism. 
 
 THE AUTHOR. 
 Brooklyn, March, 1875. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 Page 
 
 Preface 3 
 
 Contents 5 
 
 To Teachers 7 
 
 Introduction 9 
 
 Alphabet 9 
 
 Orthographic Signs 10 
 
 Vowel-Sounds 10 
 
 Diphthongs 11 
 
 Consonants 11 
 
 Liquid Letters 1- 
 
 Final Letters 12 
 
 Division of Words into Syllables. ... 12 
 
 Elision 12 
 
 Exercises in Pronouncing 13 
 
 " on Words Common to both 
 
 Languages 15 
 
 Proper Names of Persons and of 
 
 Cities 18 
 
 Part Fikst 19 
 
 Charles and Mary 20 
 
 Papa and Mamma 21 
 
 Father, Mother and Child 22 
 
 The Gate of the Garden 25 
 
 Henry's Boat 24 
 
 My Uncle and Aunt 25 
 
 The Doe: Turco 26 
 
 The Friends 27 
 
 The Walk 28 
 
 The Uncle and the Little One 29 
 
 The Nursery 30 
 
 Studying 31 
 
 To School ... 32 
 
 The Days of the Week 33 
 
 In the Parlor 34 
 
 The Prosent 35 
 
 At Breakfast ." 36 
 
 After the Meal 37 
 
 Page 
 
 At a Picnic 38 
 
 At the Banquet §9 
 
 The Dance on the Sward 40 
 
 The Return 41 
 
 At Work 42 
 
 The Canary Birds 43 
 
 Under tne Trees 44 
 
 The Race 45 
 
 Mine and Thine 4b 
 
 The New Clothes 47 
 
 The Choice 48 
 
 These and Those 49 
 
 The Salutation 50 
 
 An Acquaintance 51 
 
 The Visit 52 
 
 On Horseback and in a Carriage 53 
 
 Sunrise : 54 
 
 TheDepaiturc 55 
 
 On the Ice 56 
 
 The Weather 57 
 
 Mamma's Birthday 58 
 
 The Evening Party 59 
 
 The Governess 60 
 
 Part Second 61 
 
 Charles and Mary,— Continued 63 
 
 Father, Mother and Child " 64 
 
 Henry's Boat " 65 
 
 The Dog Turco " 66 
 
 T'.ieWalk " 67 
 
 T he Nursery " 68 
 
 To School " 69 
 
 In the Parlor " 70 
 
 At Breakfast " 71 
 
 At a Picnic " 72 
 
 The Dance on the SAvard " 73 
 
 At Work " 74 
 
 Under the Trees " 75 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 Page 
 
 Mine and Thine Continued 76 
 
 The Choice " 77 
 
 The Salutation " 78 
 
 The Visit " 79 
 
 Sunrise " 80 
 
 On the Ice " 81 
 
 Mamma's Birthday " 82 
 
 A Visit to the Market. . 83 
 
 Our House 85 
 
 The Parlor 88 
 
 The Library 91 
 
 The Dining-room 93 
 
 The Kitchen 95 
 
 My Koom 98 
 
 Part Third 119 
 
 A Correct English Version of the 
 French Exercises in Part First 
 
 and Part Second 121 
 
 Page 
 
 Part Fourth 147 
 
 A Glance at the Parts of Speech 147 
 
 Definitions of the Parts of Speech.. 147 
 
 The Noun j4g 
 
 The Article 149 
 
 The Adjective 149 
 
 The Pronoun 154 
 
 The Verb i 56 
 
 Avoir, to have 156 
 
 Etre, to be 158 
 
 Parler, to speak 159 
 
 Finir, to finish 161 
 
 Recevoir, to receive 162 
 
 Vendre, to sell 164 
 
 The Adverb 165 
 
 The Preposition 106 
 
 The Conjunction 107 
 
 The Interjection 167 
 
 At the suggestion of many of the friends of this little volume, 
 the author has added the following 
 
 HISTORIETTES. 
 
 Text. 
 
 Les Peches X Maivnier 101 
 
 Les Fraises Schrnid 103 
 
 3. Les Cerises " 
 
 4. Les Prunes " 
 
 5. Le Pot de Miel " .. 
 
 6. Le Navet " 
 
 7. La Probite Re'compensee Maritan. 
 
 8. LOgre Schmid . . 
 
 9. La Mendiante " 
 
 10. La Cigale et la Fourmi 
 
 104 
 
 106 
 
 107 
 
 109 
 
 110 
 
 113 
 
 . " 115 
 
 .La Fontaine 118 
 
 Xotet. 
 139 
 140 
 140 
 141 
 142 
 142 
 143 
 144 
 145 
 146 
 
TO TEACHERS. 
 
 This work contains Four Parts and an Introduction. 
 
 The Introduction treats of the letters and their sounds, and gives a 
 few exercises in pronouncing-. The explanations on the sounds of 
 the letters are not written for the children. 
 
 The scholars should learn the names of the letters, either the new 
 names or the old. The exercises in pronouncing may at first be omit- 
 ted. It is not deemed expedient to teach pronunciation to children 
 by means of abstract sounds. The better way is to teach them to 
 pronounce short words of simple import, the names of objects with 
 which they are acquainted. The first lessons in Part First have 
 been framed with this view; take, for instance, the following sen- 
 tence, which contains six pure vowel sounds : 
 
 Ou est le de de Marie ? 
 
 9. 4. 2. 3. 2. 1. 5. (p. 10.) 
 
 When they can pronounce such a sentence well, they should be 
 taught to give the simple vowel-sounds which it contains, and be 
 referred to the part of the introduction that treats of them. 
 While students are progressing- in the course, it will be found ben- 
 eficial to resort from time to time to the exercises in pronouncing, 
 and to keep up this practice throughout. 
 
 Part First contains twenty illustrations. There are connected with 
 each illustration two French reading exercises, with the English, 
 word for word, underneath the French. The sentences, which are 
 simple, but progressive, refer to the objects in the pictures. Each 
 exercise is preceded by a vocabulary, which contains the words that 
 are used for the first time in these lessons. 
 
 The students should learn to pronounce the words in the vocabu- 
 laries from the teacher, who should recite them with the class, until 
 they can pronounce each word correctly. 
 
 The French sentences of the exercise should be read to the class ; 
 the scholars should, in turn, follow the pronunciation of the teacher. 
 They should understand the French when the teacher pronounces it, 
 and be able to translate it, without looking in the book. 
 
8 TO TEACHERS. 
 
 After a lesson has been learned, the teacher should refer to Part 
 Third, and call the attention of the students to any difference which 
 exists in the construction of the two languages. 
 
 The facts indicative of principles in Etymology are given in the 
 vocabularies, and afterwards illustrated in the exercises. The teacher 
 should call the attention of the class to these facts, and explain 
 them, as far as the students are able to understand them. These 
 facts gradually unfold the leading principles in Etymology. The 
 treatment of the verb does not extend beyond the tenses of the indic- 
 ative mode, the infinitive and the imperative. 
 
 When the class has reached the end of Part First, the study of 
 which ought to occupy them for the term of one school-year, they 
 should review, by translating the correct English version in Part 
 Third into French, and, if practicable, they should write the sentences 
 on the blackboard. 
 
 Part Second contains no further development of principles. The 
 Exercises refer to the illustrations in Part First, explore the ground 
 more thoroughly, add to the knowledge of words, and generally 
 assume the form of conversations, by questions and answers. When 
 this part is reached, the teacher may vary the sentences in the les- 
 son, by incorporating the known elements in new forms of expres- 
 sion. It is the intention of the author to have the illustrations 
 enlarged for wall-tableaux, to be used with the class for such a pur- 
 pose. 
 
 Part Second is to be treated in the same manner as Part First, 
 and is to occupy the class another year. 
 
 At the close of the second year, the scholars are supposed to be 
 sufficiently advanced in their English studies to begin the study of 
 Grammar, in Part Fourth. As they become gradually acquainted 
 with the different parts of speech, they should learn to distinguish 
 them in their reading exercises. For this purpose, a section of a lesson, 
 towards the close of Part Second, beginning with the Market, for 
 instance, may be selected, from which they should write down, in 
 French and English, first, all the nouns, then the adjectives, pro- 
 nouns, etc. They may afterwards write the same exercises from 
 dictation, compose similar exercises, and use the same elements in a 
 variety of ways. It is one of the secrets of the profession, to vary 
 the food, in order to excite the appetite ; to which may be added 
 another one, expressed in the Latin adage, 
 
 Festina lente. 
 
INTRODUOTIOK 
 
 The French Alphabet, 
 
 Old Names. New Names. 3 
 
 A, a, 
 
 B, b, 
 
 C, c, 
 
 d, a, 
 
 E, e, 
 
 F, f, 
 
 G, g, 
 H, h, 
 
 I, i, 
 
 J. J, 
 
 K, k, 
 
 L, 1, 
 
 M, m, 
 
 ah, 
 
 bay, 
 
 say, 
 
 day, 
 
 eh, 
 
 eff, 
 
 jay 1 , 
 
 ash, 
 
 ee, 
 
 jee 1 , 
 
 kah, 
 
 el, 
 
 emm, 
 
 be. 
 
 se. 
 
 de. 
 
 e 3 . 
 
 fe. 
 
 gue. 
 
 he. 
 
 je. 
 
 ke. 
 
 le. 
 
 me. 
 
 Old Names. 
 
 enn, 
 
 pay, 
 
 N, n, 
 0, o, 
 P, P, 
 
 Q, q, 
 
 R, r, 
 
 S, s, 
 
 T, t, 
 
 U, u, - -- 
 
 V, v, vay, 
 
 W, w, double vay, 
 
 X, x, ix, 
 
 Y, y, ee-greck, 
 
 Z, z, zed, 
 
 err, 
 
 ess, 
 tay, 
 
 New Names. 
 
 ne. 
 
 pe. 
 
 que. 
 
 re. 
 
 se. 
 
 te. 
 
 ve. 
 ve. 
 kze. 
 
 ze. 
 
 Of the above letters six are vowels ; viz. : 
 a, e, i, o, u, y. 5 
 
 The others are consonants. 
 
 The w is not a French letter. It is found in a few for. 
 eign words which have been introduced into the French 
 language, and is pronounced the same as the v. 
 
 1 Thej is pronounced with a soft breathing, the same as s in pleasure. 
 
 2 The q and u have no corresponding sounds in English. 
 
 3 The e in this column has nearly the sound of u in burr. 
 
 4 Old name. 
 
 6 The y has the same sound as the i. 
 
10 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 * 
 
 1. Orthographic Signs, 
 
 The written language has accents, cedilla, diaresis, apostrophe, 
 hyphen, and the ordinary punctuation marks. 
 
 There are three accents : 
 
 The acute accent (') ; as, e ; 
 
 The grave accent (') ; as, e, a, u ; 
 
 The circumflex accent ( A ) ; as, a, e, i, 6, u. 
 
 An accent over the vowel e indicates a modification of its sound : 
 
 The e (acute) has the sound of the English letter a ; 
 
 The e (grave) has the sound of ai in fair ; 
 
 The e (circumflex) has the same sound as e, but broader. 
 
 The cedilla (J is placed under the c (9) when c has the sound of s 
 before a, 0, u; otherwise, it sounds, before these vowels, the same 
 as k. 
 
 The diceresis (") is placed over a vowel which begins a new sylla- 
 ble after another vowel ; as, mais (ma-is). 
 
 The apostrophe (') indicates the suppression of a vowel ; as, l'ami 
 for le ami ; l'homme for le homme. 
 
 The hyphen (-) serves to connect two or more words, or parts of a 
 word ; as, ai-je ; arc-en-ciel. 
 
 2. Vowel- Sounds. 
 
 There are nine pure vowel-sounds, and four nasal vowel-sounds. 
 
 1. Pure Vowel- Sounds. 
 The pure vowel-sounds are : 
 
 a, e, e, e or #, i or y, o, u, eu, ou. 
 
 The following compound vowels represent some of the pure vowel 
 sounds : 
 
 ea sounds as a. aie, ais, or ait, sounds as e. 
 
 ee " " e. au, or eau " " 0. 
 
 ai " " e. oeu " " eu. 
 
 2. Nasal Vowel- Sounds. 
 The four nasal vowel-sounds are : 
 
 an, in, on, un. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 11 
 
 M, preceded by a vowel, has the nasal sound of n. Em, or en, 
 has the nasal sound of an ; but en, preceded by i, has the nasal 
 sound of in. 
 
 The nasal sounds are represented by 
 
 an ^| in ") 
 
 am im on ) un ) 
 
 y = an. y = in. [ = on - J- = un. 
 
 en [ ain j om J urn) 
 
 emj aim J 
 
 M and n, when double or followed by a vowel, are not nasal. 
 
 8. Diphthongs. 
 
 A diphthong is a combination of two vowel-sounds which are both 
 heard in pronouncing. 
 Pure diphthongs, ia, ie, ieu, oi, oue, oui, ui, etc. 
 Nasal diphthongs, ian, ien, ion, oin, uin, etc. 
 
 4. Consonants. 
 
 The consonants are pronounced the same as in English, with some 
 exceptions. 
 
 O before e, i, y, or 9 before a, u, has the sound of s ; c, in all 
 other cases, has the sound of k. 
 
 Ch, followed by a vowel, has generally the sound of sh ; but ch, 
 followed by a consonant, has the sound of k. Ch has the sound of 
 k in words from the Greek and Hebrew ; as, echo, Cham. 
 
 G before e, i, y, has the sound of s in pleasure ; before a, 0, u, it 
 has the sound of the English g in gate. 
 
 H is silent. It is called aspirate when a preceding vowel (e or a) 
 is not elided before it (8). 
 
 S has the hissing sound of c at the beginning of a word or sylla- 
 ble ; but between two vowels, it has the sound of z. Double s (ss), 
 between two vowels, has always the sound of c. 
 
 Sch has the sound of sh. 
 
 T has, in some words, the sound of c ; as, nation. 
 
 Th is sounded like t ; as, tlie. 
 
 X is a double letter. It sometimes represents the sound of gz ; 
 as, examen ; sometimes of kz ; as, maxime ; sometimes of ss ; as. 
 soixante ; and sometimes of z: as, deuxieme* 
 
12 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 5. Liquid Letters, 
 
 G and 1 are called liquid letters when they are pronounced so 
 smoothly that their natural sounds are not heard. 
 
 G is liquid before n, as in the English word mignonette. 
 
 L is generally liquid when it is preceded by i. The liquid sound 
 of 1 is heard in the English word brilliant. 
 
 6\ Final Letters, 
 
 Unaccented final e is silent in words of more than one syllable. 
 
 A final consonant is generally silent. But a final consonant before 
 a word that begins with a vowel or an unaspirated h, is generally 
 pronounced with the next syllable ; as, Vous etes mon ami, pro- 
 nounced Vou zet mo nami. 
 
 Final d before a vowel is sounded like t : quand il. 
 
 f " '• " " f>: neufheures. 
 
 g " " " " k: ranglleve. 
 
 " s or x " " " " z: ils ont deux enfants. 
 
 The t of et (and) and the z of assez (enough) are never pronounced. 
 
 7. Division of Words into Syllables. 
 
 In dividing words into syllables, a single consonant between two 
 vowels belongs to the vowel that follows ; as, raser {ra-ser). 
 
 The first part of a double consonant belongs to the vowel that pre- 
 cedes ; the second, to the vowel that follows ; the latter only is pro- 
 nounced ; as, addition, pronounced a-di cion. 
 
 Two consonants in the middle of a word are separated ; as, parler 
 (par-ler) ; except the following combinatious, which are inseparable, 
 and pronounced with the vowel that follows : bl, br, eh, ehl, chr, ci, 
 or, dl, dr, fl,fr, gl, gn, gr, gu, ph,phl, pl,pr, qu, rh, th, thl, thr, tr, or. 
 
 8. Elision. 
 
 The final e of words of one syllable, and the a of la, are elided 
 (suppressed) before a word that begins with a vowel or an unaspirated 
 h, and an apostrophe indicates the elision. The consonaut with the 
 apostrophe is pronounced with the next vowel as one syllable. J'ai 
 (je) for je-ai, l'orange (lorange) for la orange, l'habit (labit) for le 
 habit, The i of # is elided before il, ils. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 13 
 
 Exercises in Pronouncing. 
 
 (The pnpil should iiame the letters in French, giving to each vowel its proper 
 
 sound.) 
 
 1. Pure Vowel-Sounds Combined with Consonants. 
 [Final consonants are silent, except those marked by an asterisk (*).] 
 
 
 a 
 
 e: 
 
 e: 
 
 e or e 
 
 i: 1 or y 
 
 : o: 
 
 u: 
 
 eu: 
 
 ou: 
 
 
 ba 
 
 be, 
 
 be, 
 
 be, 
 
 bi, 
 
 bo, 
 
 bu, 
 
 beu, 
 
 bou. 
 
 k: 
 
 ca, 
 
 que, 
 
 que, 
 
 que, 
 
 qui, 
 
 CO, 
 
 cu, 
 
 queu, 
 
 cou. 
 
 k: 
 
 cla, 
 
 cle, 
 
 cle, 
 
 cle, 
 
 cri, 
 
 cro, 
 
 cru, 
 
 creu, 
 
 crou. 
 
 s: 
 
 ca, 
 
 ce, 
 
 ce, 
 
 ce, 
 
 ci, 
 
 90, 
 
 cu, 
 
 ceu, 
 
 cou. 
 
 sh: 
 
 cha, 
 
 clie, 
 
 che, 
 
 che, 
 
 chi, 
 
 cho, 
 
 chu, 
 
 cheu , 
 
 chou. 
 
 k: 
 
 chla, 
 
 clile, 
 
 clile, 
 
 chle, 
 
 chri, 
 
 chro, 
 
 chru, 
 
 chreu 
 
 , chrou 
 
 
 da, 
 
 de, 
 
 de, 
 
 de, 
 
 di, 
 
 do, 
 
 du, 
 
 deu, 
 
 dou. 
 
 
 fa, 
 
 fe, 
 
 fe, 
 
 fe, 
 
 fi, 
 
 fo, 
 
 fu, 
 
 feu, 
 
 fou. 
 
 g hard: 
 
 ga, 
 
 gue, 
 
 gue, 
 
 gue, 
 
 gui, 
 
 go, 
 
 gu, 
 
 gueu, 
 
 gou. 
 
 g soft: 
 
 gea, 
 
 ge, 
 
 ge, 
 
 ge, 
 
 gi> 
 
 geo, 
 
 geu. 
 
 
 
 
 lia, 
 
 he, 
 
 he, 
 
 he, 
 
 hi, 
 
 ho, 
 
 hu, 
 
 lieu, 
 
 hou. 
 
 
 ja, 
 
 je, 
 
 je, 
 
 je, 
 
 ji> 
 
 jo, 
 
 ju, 
 
 jeu, 
 
 jou. 
 
 
 la, 
 
 le, 
 
 le, 
 
 le, 
 
 li, 
 
 lo, 
 
 la, 
 
 leu, 
 
 lou. 
 
 
 ma, 
 
 me, 
 
 me, 
 
 me, 
 
 mi, 
 
 mo, 
 
 mu, 
 
 meu, 
 
 mou. 
 
 
 na, 
 
 ne, 
 
 ne, 
 
 ne, 
 
 ni, 
 
 no, 
 
 nu, 
 
 neu, 
 
 nou. 
 
 
 pa, 
 
 pe, 
 
 pe, 
 
 pe, 
 
 Pi 
 
 po, 
 
 pu, 
 
 peu, 
 
 pou. 
 
 
 qua, 
 
 que, 
 
 que, 
 
 que, 
 
 qui, 
 
 quo, 
 
 
 
 queu, 
 
 quou. 
 
 
 ra, 
 
 re, 
 
 re, 
 
 re, 
 
 ri, 
 
 ro, 
 
 ru, 
 
 reu, 
 
 rou. 
 
 
 sa, 
 
 se, 
 
 se, 
 
 se, 
 
 si, 
 
 so, 
 
 su, 
 
 seu, 
 
 sou. 
 
 
 ta, 
 
 te, 
 
 te, 
 
 te, 
 
 ti, 
 
 to, 
 
 tu, 
 
 teu, 
 
 tou. 
 
 
 va, 
 
 ve, 
 
 ve, 
 
 ve, 
 
 vi, 
 
 vo, 
 
 vu, 
 
 veu, 
 
 vou. 
 
 
 xa, 
 
 xe, 
 
 xe, 
 
 xe, 
 
 xi, 
 
 xo, 
 
 xu, 
 
 xeu, 
 
 xou. 
 
 
 za, 
 
 ze, 
 
 ze, 
 
 ze, 
 
 zi, 
 
 zo, 
 
 zu, 
 
 zeu, 
 
 zou. 
 
 2. Compound Vowel-Sounds Combined with Consonants. 
 
 dau, maux, faux, 
 beau, seau, teau. 
 eu, eut, eutes. 
 
 vo3u, ceuf * boeuf * 
 
 ea 
 
 = a 
 
 ' gea, 
 
 jea, 
 
 
 
 au = o : 
 
 ee 
 
 = e: 
 
 dee, 
 
 fee, 
 
 lee. 
 
 eau = o : 
 
 ai 
 
 = e. 
 
 j'ai, 
 
 lai, 
 
 rai. 
 
 eu = u : 
 
 aie - 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ais 
 
 - = e: 
 
 plaie, 
 
 mais, 
 
 lait. 
 
 ceu = eu 
 
 ait. . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
14 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 an: en, sang, 
 
 in : lin, vin, 
 
 on: son, bon, 
 
 un: brun, aucun, cliacun, 
 
 3. Nasal Vowel-Sounds. 
 
 , cent, sens,* dent, 
 timbre, simple, faim, pain, 
 long, rond, gond, plomb, 
 
 quand, banc, 
 daim, sein. 
 ombre, sombre, 
 tribun, commun, parf um, humble 
 
 4. Pure Diphthongs. 
 
 ia: fia, lia, cria, scia. ieu: pieu, lieu, mieux, cieux. 
 
 ie: fier, lier, crie, scie. oi: foi, loi, moi, toi. 
 
 iel: fiel,* miel,* ciel* tiel* (ciel). ui: bruit, fruit, lui, nuit. 
 
 5. Nasal Diphthongs. 
 
 ien: bien, lien, mien, rien. 
 
 ion: lion, rions, scion, tion (cion). 
 
 oin: foin, loin, soin, poing. 
 uin: juin, suint. 
 
 6. Liquid Letters. 
 
 gn: 
 
 campagne, 
 
 montagne, 
 
 ligne, 
 
 signe. 
 
 
 rognon, 
 
 oignon, 
 
 poignee, 
 
 poignard. 
 
 il, ille: 
 
 fusil, 
 
 babil, 
 
 brille, 
 
 coquille. 
 
 eil, eille: 
 
 soleil, 
 
 pareil, 
 
 sommeil, 
 
 oreille. 
 
 ail, aille: 
 
 betail, 
 
 travail, 
 
 paille, 
 
 bataille. 
 
 euil, euille: 
 
 deuil, 
 
 fauteuil, 
 
 feuille, 
 
 cueille. 
 
 ouil, ouille: 
 
 bouillir, 
 
 bouillon, 
 
 bouille, 
 
 rouille. 
 
 
 7. 
 
 The Unaccented e. 
 
 
 e = u in burr, de, ce, le, 
 
 me, ne, 
 
 que. 
 
 e final, silent, age, 
 
 e almost silent, cable, fable, 
 
 e " " besoin, aclieter, 
 
 pronounce (b'soin), (acli'te), 
 e = e, et, rez, 
 
 pronounce (e), (re) 
 
 cage, fille, forme, liste. 
 table, sabre, marbre, mitre, 
 demande, elever, samedi, demi. 
 (d'mand), (el've), (sam'di), (d'mi). 
 clef, bled, pied, parler, 
 
 (cle), (ble), (pie), (parle). 
 
 8. Elision. 
 
 L'or, l'argent, d'or, d'argent, l'enfant, l'liomme. L'orange qu'il m'a 
 dbnnee. L'habit qu'il t'a fait. L'ami l'a mis dans 1'eau. S'il t'a dit 
 cela (c'la). S'ils l'ont vu. S'il s'en va. S'il s'y fie. J'ai l'ananas. 
 J'aurai l'orange. Qu'en dit-on ? 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 15 
 
 9. Final Consonants Before Initial Vowels. 
 
 Je vous ai fait appeler. Vous Gtes arrive apres elle. Quand on est alle 
 l'appeler, il etait endormi. II n'etait pas encore neuf heures. II etait en- 
 core en bas. lis ont dix en f ants. C'est un grand homme. 11 est ici, 
 et elle aussi. C'est assez evident. 
 
 Exercises on Words Common to Both 
 Languages. 
 
 (The orthography of these words is alike or nearly alike in both languages ; the 
 chief difference is in the pronunciation.) 
 
 
 1. 
 
 Word, 
 
 ? in ade. 
 
 
 Arcade, 
 
 arcade; 
 
 
 limonade, 
 
 lemonade; 
 
 ballade, 
 balustrade, 
 brigade, 
 camarade, 
 
 ballad; 
 balustrade; 
 brigade; 
 comrade; 
 
 
 parade, 
 promenade, 
 pommade, 
 salade, 
 
 parade; 
 promenade 
 pomade; 
 salad; 
 
 And many 
 
 others. 
 
 
 
 
 
 2. 
 
 Words 
 
 in age. 
 
 
 Age, 
 bandage, 
 
 age; 
 bandage ; 
 
 
 langage, 
 Page, 
 
 language; 
 page; 
 
 cage, 
 
 cage; 
 
 
 passage, 
 
 passage; 
 
 carnage, 
 courage, 
 And many 
 
 carnage; 
 courage; 
 others. 
 
 
 sage, 
 village, 
 
 sage; 
 village; 
 
 
 3 
 
 . Words in al. 
 
 
 Animal, 
 caporal, 
 carnaval, 
 
 animal ; 
 
 corporal; 
 
 carnival; 
 
 
 hopital, 
 journal, 
 metal, 
 
 hospital; 
 journal; 
 metal ; 
 
 general, 
 
 general; 
 
 
 principal, 
 
 principal; 
 
 And many others. 
 
16 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 Adversaire, 
 dictionnaire, 
 dromadaire, 
 militaire, 
 
 4. Words in aire : 
 adversary; 
 dictionary; 
 dromedary; 
 military; 
 
 ary. 
 notaire, 
 pensionnaire, 
 rosaire, 
 secretaire, 
 
 And many others. 
 
 5. Words in ance and ence. 
 
 Alliance 
 assistance, 
 balance, 
 enfance, 
 
 alliance; 
 assistance; 
 balance; 
 infancy; 
 
 indolence, 
 prudence, 
 silence, 
 violence, 
 
 And many others. 
 
 6. Words 
 Acteur, actor; 
 
 auteur, author ; 
 
 ambassadeur, embassador; 
 conducteur, conductor; 
 And many others. 
 
 createur, 
 inspecteur, 
 interieur, 
 superieur, 
 
 7. Words in ion. 
 
 notary; 
 pensionary s " 
 rosary; 
 secretary; 
 
 indolence; 
 prudence; 
 silence; 
 violence; 
 
 creator ; 
 inspector; 
 interior; 
 superior; 
 
 Action, 
 
 action ; 
 
 notion, 
 
 notion; 
 
 ambition, 
 
 ambition ; 
 
 procession, 
 
 procession; 
 
 creation, 
 
 creation ; 
 
 profusion, 
 
 profusion; 
 
 nation, 
 
 nation; 
 
 proportion, 
 
 proportion; 
 
 And many 
 
 others. 
 
 
 
 
 8. 
 
 Words in re. 
 
 
 Ambre, 
 
 amber; 
 
 mitre, 
 
 miter; 
 
 chambre, 
 
 chamber; 
 
 sabre, 
 
 saber; 
 
 cidre, 
 
 cider; 
 
 theatre s 
 
 theater; 
 
 lettre, 
 
 letter; 
 
 
 
 And many others. 
 
 9. Words in ice. 
 
 Caprice, 
 
 caprice; 
 
 office, 
 
 office; 
 
 edifice, 
 
 edifice; 
 
 service, 
 
 service; 
 
 malice, 
 
 malice; 
 
 vice, 
 
 Vice; 
 
 And many others. 
 
Artiste, 
 
 artist ; 
 
 buste, 
 
 bust; 
 
 dentiste, 
 
 dentist; 
 
 forme, 
 
 form; 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 17 
 
 10. Words having a final e in French and not in English. 
 
 journaliste, journalist; 
 
 liste, list; 
 
 terme, term; 
 
 verbe, verb; 
 And many others. 
 
 11. Words having a final e in English and not in French. 
 
 Candidat, candidate; magistrat, magistrate; 
 
 chocolat chocolate; prelat, prelate; 
 
 certificat, certificate; senat, senate; 
 
 And some others. 
 
 12. Words ending in te in French and in ty in English. 
 
 Beaute, beauty; liberte, liberty; 
 
 calamite, calamity; qualite, quality; 
 
 depute, deputy; societe, society; 
 
 And some others. 
 
 13. Words ending in French in ie and in English in y. 
 Aristocratie, aristocracy; democratic, democracy; 
 
 broderie, embroidery; 
 
 flatterie, 
 
 flattery; 
 
 cavalerie, cavalry; 
 
 maladie, 
 
 malady 
 
 And some others. 
 
 
 
 14. Words ending in ique ; English ic. 
 
 Arithmetique, arithmetic; musique, music; 
 
 fabrique, fabric; pique-nique, picnic; 
 
 logique, logic; tonique tonic; 
 
 And some others. 
 
 15. Words in ure. 
 
 Agriculture, agriculture; figure, figure; 
 
 aventure, adventure; litterature, literature; 
 
 creature, creature; nature, nature; 
 
 And some others. 
 
18 
 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 Some Proper Names of Persons. 
 
 Ada, 
 
 Adah; 
 
 Gautier, 
 
 Walter; 
 
 Adele, 
 
 Adela; 
 
 Geoffrey, 
 
 Jeffry; 
 
 Adolphe, 
 
 Adolphus; 
 
 Georges, 
 
 George; 
 
 Agnes, 
 
 Agnes; 
 
 Gregoire, 
 
 Gregory; 
 
 Amelie, 
 
 Amelia; 
 
 Guillaume, 
 
 William; 
 
 Anne, 
 
 Ann; Anna; 
 
 Gustave, 
 
 Gustavus; 
 
 Annette, 
 
 Nancy; 
 
 Helene, 
 
 Helen; 
 
 Antoine, 
 
 Anthony; 
 
 Henri, 
 
 Henry; 
 
 Arnaud, 
 
 Arnold; 
 
 Henriette, 
 
 Henrietta 
 
 Berthe, 
 
 Bertha; 
 
 Isabelle, 
 
 Isabella; 
 
 Blanche, 
 
 Blanch; 
 
 Jacques, 
 
 James; 
 
 Brigitte, 
 
 Bridget; 
 
 Jean, 
 
 John ; 
 
 Camille, 
 
 Camilla; 
 
 Jules, 
 
 Julius; 
 
 Celie, 
 
 Celia; 
 
 Julie, 
 
 Julia; 
 
 Charles, 
 
 Charles; 
 
 Laure, 
 
 Laura; 
 
 Chariot, 
 
 Charley; 
 
 Leonard, 
 
 Leonard; 
 
 Clotilde, 
 
 Clotilda; 
 
 Lisette, 
 
 Lizzie; 
 
 Denis, 
 
 Dennis; 
 
 Louis, 
 
 Louis; 
 
 Edmond, 
 
 Edmund; 
 
 Louise, 
 
 Louisa; 
 
 Edouard, 
 
 Edward; 
 
 Lucie, 
 
 Lucy; 
 
 Elie, 
 
 Elias; 
 
 Marguerite, 
 
 Margaret; 
 
 Elisee, 
 
 Elisha; 
 
 Marie, 
 
 Mary; 
 
 Emile, 
 
 JSmilius; 
 
 Mathilde, 
 
 Matilda ; 
 
 Emilie, 
 
 Emily ; 
 
 Sophie, 
 
 Sophia ; 
 
 Etienne, 
 
 Stephen; 
 
 Susanne, 
 
 Susanna. 
 
 Some Proper Names of Cities. 
 
 Anvers, 
 
 Antwerp ; 
 
 Berlin, 
 
 Berlin ; 
 
 Breme, 
 
 Bremen ; 
 
 Bruxelles, 
 
 Brussels ; 
 
 Calais, 
 
 Calais ; 
 
 Cologne, 
 
 Cologne ; 
 
 Dresde, 
 
 Dresden ; 
 
 Edinbourg, 
 
 Edinburgh 
 
 Francfort, 
 
 Frankfort 
 
 Le Havre, 
 
 Havre ; 
 
 La Haye, 
 
 The Hague 
 
 Londres, 
 
 London ; 
 
 Lyon, 
 
 Lyons ; 
 
 Madrid, 
 
 Madrid ; 
 
 Mayence, 
 
 Mentz ; 
 
 Naples, 
 
 Naples ; 
 
 Paris, 
 
 Paris ; 
 
 Rome, 
 
 Bome ; 
 
 Venise, 
 
 Venice ; 
 
 Vienne, 
 
 Vienna. 
 
PAKT FIRST. 
 
20 
 
 CHARLES AND MARY. 
 
 
 1. Vocabulary. 
 
 
 a, lias ; 
 
 le, la, the ; 
 
 est, is ; 
 
 de, of ; 
 
 le de, tlie tliimble ; 
 
 qui, who ; 
 
 de, tliimble ; 
 
 la clef, tlie key ; 
 
 ou, where ; 
 
 clef, key ; 
 
 et, and ; 
 
 ici, here ; la, there. 
 
 2. Charles et Marie. (Charles and Mary.) 
 
 Qui a le de de Marie? 
 
 Who has the thimble of Mary ? (Mary's thimble). 
 
 Charles a le de de Marie. 
 
 Charles has the thimble of Mary. 
 
 Ou est Charles? 
 
 Where is Charles ? 
 
 Charles est ici. 
 
 Charles is here. 
 
 Ou est la clef de Charles? 
 
 Where is the key of Charles? (Charles' sJcei,) 
 
 La clef de Charles est la. 
 
 The key of Charles is there. 
 
 Le de et la clef. 
 
 The thimble and the key. 
 
 
 
 
PAPA AND MAMMA. 
 
 21 
 
 3. Vocabulary, 
 
 je, i ; 
 
 je vois, I see ; 
 papa, papa ; 
 maman, mamma ; 
 le sofa, the sofa ; 
 la chaise, the chair; 
 la table, the table ; 
 
 sur, on, upon ; 
 
 sous, under ; 
 
 voici, (see here), here is, here are ; 
 
 voila, (see (here), there is, there are 
 
 c'est, (for ce est), that is, it is ; 
 
 Anne, Ann ; Elise, Eliza ; 
 
 ou, or. 
 
 4. Papa et Maman. (Papa and Mamma.) 
 
 Je vois papa et maman, 
 
 I see papa aud mamma, 
 
 sur le sofa. 
 
 on the sola. 
 
 Voiei Charles et Marie. 
 
 Here are Charles and Mary. 
 
 Voila la clef de Charles, sur la table. 
 
 There is the key of Charles, on the table. 
 
 Oil est la chaise? 
 
 Where is the chair? 
 
 La chaise est sous la table. 
 
 The chair is under the table. 
 
 Qui est la? 
 
 Who is there? 
 
 C'est Anne ou Elise. 
 
 It is Ann or Eliza. 
 
 un homme, a man ; 
 un enfant, a child ; 
 un arbre, a tree ; 
 
 5, un, une, a or an. 
 
 une femme, a woman ; 
 une orange, an orange 
 une maison, a house. 
 
22 
 
 FATHER, MOTHER, AND CHILD. 
 
 6, Vocabulary. 
 
 le pere, the father ; a la maison, to the house ; 
 
 la mere, the mother ; de la maison, of the house ; 
 
 l'enfant (for le enfant), the child ; un banc, a bench ; 
 
 l'homme (for le homme), the man ; un jardin, a garden ; 
 
 a, at, to ; une porte, a door ; a gate ; 
 
 a l'arbre, at the tree ; la-bas, yonder. 
 
 7. Le P&re, la Mere et I' Enfant. (Father, if of her, and Child.) 
 
 Je vois un homme, une femme et un enfant. 
 
 I see a man, a woman and a child. 
 
 L' enfant a une orange. 
 
 The child has an 
 
 orange. 
 
 L' homme est le pere de Y enfant. 
 
 The. man is the father of the child. 
 
 La femme est la mere de Y enfant. 
 
 The woman is the mother of the child. 
 
 La femme est a la porte de la maison. 
 
 The 
 
 at the door 
 
 of the 
 
 house. 
 
 Yoila un banc sous Y arbre. 
 
 There is a bench under the tree. 
 
 Je vois un jardin la-bas. 
 
 T pea a Harden fonder. 
 
 
THE GARDEN-GATE. 23 
 
 8. Vocabulary. 
 
 du {for de le), of the ; il va, lie goes ; elle va, she goes : 
 
 du jardin, of the garden ; va-t-il ? does he go ? is he going ? 
 
 au (for a le), at the ; to the ; va-t-elle? does she go? is she going? 
 
 au jardin, to the garden ; dans, in, into ; 
 
 il, he, it ; elle, she, it ; un cabas, a satchel, a bag ; 
 
 il a, he has ; elle a, she has ; la main, the hand ; 
 
 a-t-il ? has he ? a-t-elle ? has she ? a la main, at the hand, in the hand. 
 
 9, La Porte du Jardin. (The Gate of the Garden.) 
 
 Je vois la porte du jardin. 
 
 I see the gate of the garden. 
 
 Jj homrae a la clef du jardin. 
 
 The man has the key of the garden. 
 
 II va au jardin. 
 
 He is going to the garden. 
 
 Voila Y enfant au banc. 
 
 There is the child at the bench. 
 
 A-t-il une orange? 
 
 Has it an orange? 
 
 La femme a un cabas a la main. 
 
 The woman has a satchel in her hand. 
 
 Ou va-t-elle? 
 
 Where is she going ? 
 
 Elle va dans la maison. 
 
 She is going into the house. 
 
 10. mo?i, ma, my. 
 
 mon pere, my father ; ma mere, my mother ; 
 
 mon frere, my brother ; ma sceur, my sister ; 
 
 mon Oncle, my uncle ; ma tante, my aunt ; 
 
 mon cousin, my (boy) cousin ; ma cousin©, my (girl) cousin. 
 
24 
 
 HENRY'S BOAT. 
 
 j'ai (for je ai), I have ; 
 un bateau, a boat ; 
 une poupee, a doll ; 
 
 11, Vocabulary. 
 
 il s'appelle 1 Henri, lie is called Henry; 
 
 est-ce que (qu'), is it that ; 
 
 est-ce qu'il va ?' J does he go ? is he going 
 
 l'eau(/<?r la eau), the water; bien, well; tres, very; tres-bien, very well. 
 
 12. Le Bateau d 9 Henri. {Henry's Boat.) 
 
 J'ai un frere et une sceur. 
 
 I have a brother and 
 
 sister. 
 
 Mon frere s'appelle Henri. 
 
 My brother is called Henry. 
 
 Ma soeur s'appelle Julie. 
 
 My sister is called Julia. 
 
 Henri 
 
 Henry 
 
 Le bateau d' 
 
 a un bateau ; Julie a une poupee. 
 
 as a boat ; Julia has a doll. 
 
 Henri est dans 1' eau. 
 
 The 
 
 boat 
 
 of 
 
 Henry 
 
 the water. 
 
 Est-ce qu'il va bien ? 
 
 Does it go well? 
 
 II va tres-bien. 
 
 It goes very well. 
 
 1 II s'appelle (for il se appelle), literally, he calls himself. 
 
 a E<t-cc qu'il va? means the same as va-t-il ? (See Vocabulary, p. 83.) 
 
UNCLE AND A UNT. 25 
 
 13. Vocabulary. 
 
 ton, ta, thy ; {your) ; il joue, lie plays, lie is playing ; 
 
 son, sa, his, her, its ; joue-t-il ? ) is he playing ? or, 
 
 son oncle, his uncle, her uncle ; est-ce qu'il joue ? ) does he play V 
 sa tante, his aunt, her aunt ; Julie joue-t-elle ? ) is Julia play- 
 je suis, I am ; est-ce que Juliejoue ? ) ing ? 
 
 je vais, I go, I am going ; avec, with. 
 
 14. Mon Oncle et ma Tante. (My Uncle and Aunt.) 
 
 Je vois ton pere et ta mere la-bas. 
 
 I see your father and — mother yonder. 
 
 Ton pere est mon oncle. 
 
 Your father is ray uncle. 
 
 Ta mere est ma tante. 
 
 Your mother is my aunt. 
 
 Je suis ton cousin. 
 
 I am your cousin. 
 
 Julie est ma cousine. 
 
 Julia is my cousin. 
 
 Voila Henri a l'eau ; joue-t-il avec son bateau? 
 
 There is Henry at the water ; is he playing with his boat? 
 
 Est-ce que Juliejoue avec sa poupee? 
 
 Does Julia play with her doll? 
 
 Je vais a la maison. 
 
 I am going to the house (home). 
 
 C estbien. 
 
 That is well. 
 
 15. petit, petite, small, little. 
 
 un petit de, a small thimble; grand, grande, large, tall; 
 
 une petite clef, a small key; joli, jolie, pretty ; 
 
 bon, bonne, good. 
 2 
 
26 
 
 THE DOG TURGO. 
 
 un chien, a dog : 
 un chat, a cat ; 
 
 16, Vocabulary. 
 
 un cheval, a horse 
 
 17. Le Chien Turco. (The Dog Turco.) 
 
 Je vois un grand chien ; c'est un bon chien. 
 
 I see a large dog ; it is a good dog. 
 
 II s'appelle Turco. 
 
 It is called Turco. 
 
 Yoila une grande vache ; c'est une bonne vache. 
 
 There is a large cow ; it is a good cow. 
 
 J ilie a un petit chat. 
 
 yulia has a little cat (kitten). 
 
 Son petit chat est tres-joli. 
 
 Her kitten is very pretty. 
 
 Julie est ma petite cousine. 
 
 Jnlia is my little cousin. 
 
 J'ai un bon petit cheval. 
 
 I have a good little horse. 
 
 Mon petit cheval va tres-bien. 
 
 My little horse goes very well. 
 
THE FRIENDS. 27 
 
 18. Vocabulary, 
 
 un garcon, a boy ; tu as, thou liast (you have) ; 
 
 une fille, a girl ; qu'as-tu ? what hast thou ? 
 
 un ami, a friend (boy) ; tu vas, thou goest (you go) ; 
 
 une amie, a friend (girl) ; Ou vas-tu ? where dost thou go 1 
 
 que (qu') ? what ? tu vois, thou seest (you see). 
 
 19. JLeS Amis. (The Friends.) 
 
 Je vois un garcon et une fille. 
 
 I see a boy and a girl. 
 
 O'est un tres-bon garcon. 
 
 It is a very good boy. 
 
 II est mon ami. 
 
 He is my friend. 
 
 Sa soeur est une bonne fille. 
 
 His sister is a good girl. 
 
 Elle est Pamie de ma soeur. 
 
 She is the friend of my sister. 
 
 Qu'as-tu? or Qu'est-ce que tu as ? 
 
 What have you ? # r 
 
 J'ai mon petit bateau. 
 
 I have my little boat. 
 
 Ou vas-tu? 
 
 Where are you going ? 
 
 Je vais a Feau avec Turco. 
 
 I am going to the water with Turco. 
 
 20. ce, cet, cette, this, that. 
 
 ce garqon, this boy, that boy ; cet homme, this man, that man ; 
 cet enfant, this child, that child; cette femme, this woman, that woman. 
 
28 
 
 THE WALK. 
 
 21. Vocabulary. 
 
 un monsieur, a gentleman ; tu es, thou art (you are) ; es-tu ? art thou 1 
 
 une dame, a lady ; 
 sa femme, his wife ; 
 son fils, his son ; 
 sa fille, his daughter ; 
 
 je connais, I kno^ 
 connais-tu ? knowest thou ? (do you know f) 
 cette demoiselle, that young lady ; 
 oui, yes. 
 
 22. La Promenade. (The ]Yaik.) 
 
 Je vais a la promenade avec mem oncle. 
 
 I am going for a walk with my uncle. 
 
 Connais-tu ce monsieur ? 
 
 Do you know that gentleman ? 
 
 Oui, mon oncle ; e'est monsieur Lambert. 
 
 Yes uncle; it is Mister Lambert. 
 
 Cette dame est sa femme. 
 
 That lady is his wife. 
 
 Cette demoiselle est sa fille. 
 
 That young lady is -his daughter. 
 
 Cet enfant est son fils Henri. 
 
 That child is his son Henry. 
 
 Henri, es-tu mon ami ? 
 
 Henry, are you my friend? 
 
THE UNCLE AND THE LITTLE ONE. 29 
 
 23. Vocabulary. 
 
 non, no; ne-pas, not. 
 
 je n'ai pas, I have not ; fatigue, fatiguee, tired ; 
 
 tu n'as pas, thou hast not ; malade, sick ; 
 
 il n'a pas, he has not ; le (1'), him, it ; 
 
 n'a-t-il pas ? has he not ? la (1'), her, it ; 
 
 je ne suis pas, I am not ; je le vois, I see him ; 
 
 tu n'es pas, thou art not ; je ne la connais pas, I do not know her. 
 
 24. L'Ollcle et la Petite. {The Uncle and the Utile One.) 
 
 Tu n'es pas fatiguee, Marie ? 
 
 You are not tired, Mary? 
 
 Non, mon ancle ; je ne snis pas fatiguee. 
 
 No, uncle; I am not tired. 
 
 Ou. est ton amie Anne ? Je ne la vois pas. 
 
 Where is your friend Anne? I her see not. 
 
 Elle n'est pas ici ; elle est malade. 
 
 She is not here ; she is sick. 
 
 Connais-tu cet horame ? 
 
 Do you know that man ? 
 
 Oui, je le connais bien. 
 
 Yes, I him know well. 
 
 Ou est ton cabas, ma petite? 
 
 Where is your ba^, my little one? 
 
 Je Fai ; le voici. 
 
 I it have ; it here is (here it is). 
 
 25. nous, we ; vous, you ; Us, elles, they. 
 
 nous avons, we have; nous sommes, we are; 
 
 vous avez, you have ; vous 6tes, you are ; 
 
 ils ont, ) , ils sont, ) xl 
 
 elUB out, \ the r bave - elles sont, \ t,,ey are ' 
 
30 
 
 THE NURSERY. 
 
 26. Vocabulary. 
 
 les, the; them; des, of the; aux, to the; le livre, the book ; 
 
 les enfants, the children ; 
 je les vois, I see them ; 
 des enfants, of the children ; 
 aux enfants, to the children ; 
 
 le cahier, the copy-book ; 
 la plume, the pen ; 
 lu, read ; 
 ecrit, written. 
 
 27 > La Chambre des Enfants. {The Nursery.) 
 
 Ou etes-vous ? 
 
 Where are 
 
 you 
 
 Nous sommes dans la chambre des enfants. 
 
 We are in the nursery. 
 
 Ou sont les livres ? les avez-vous ? 
 
 Where are the books ? them have you ? {have you them ?) 
 
 lis sont ici ; je les ai. 
 
 They are here; I them have {I have them). 
 
 Les plumes sont sur la table, avec les cahiers. 
 
 The pens are on the table, with the copy-books. 
 
 Nous avons ecrit. 
 
 We have written. 
 
 lis ont tres-bien lu. 
 
 They have very well read {read very welt). 
 
STUDYING. 31 
 
 28, Vocabulary, 
 
 mes, my ; tes, thy ; ces, these, those ; su, known; 
 
 ses, his, her, its ; le crayon, the pencil ; vu, seen ; 
 
 notre, nos, our ; la legon, the lesson ; perdu, lost ; 
 
 votre, vos, your ; je sais, I know ; trouve, found ; 
 
 leur, leurs, their ; sais-tu ? knowest thou ? (do you apporte, brought. 
 
 know f) 
 
 29, A VEtude. {Studying.) 
 
 Les enfants sout a Tetucle. 
 
 The children are studying. 
 
 J'ai perdu mes crayons. 
 
 I have lost my pencils. 
 
 Ton frere a trouve tes crayons. 
 
 Your brother has found your pencils. 
 
 Elise n'a pas apporte ses livres. 
 
 Eliza has not brought her books. 
 
 Mes amis, j'ai vu votre oncle et vos cousins. 
 
 My friends, I have seen your uncle and your cousins. 
 
 Anne a vu notre oncle et nos cousins. 
 
 Ann has seen our uncle and our cousins. 
 
 Sais-tu la lecon ? 
 
 Do you know the lesson ? 
 
 Je ne la sais pas bien. 
 
 I it know not well. 
 
 Ces enfants n'ont pas su leurs lecons. 
 
 These children have not known their lessons. 
 
 30, quel, quelle ; quels, quelles, what, winch. 
 
 quel jour ? what day ? quelle heure ? what hour ? 
 
 quel jour est-ce ? what day is it ? quelle heure est-il ? what hour is it ? 
 
32 
 
 TO SCHOOL. 
 
 un jour, a day ; 
 aujourd'hui, to-day ; 
 lundi, Monday ; 
 
 1, 2, 3, 
 
 31. Vocabulary. 
 
 l'ecole {for la ecole), the school ; 
 une heure, an hour ; one o'clock ; 
 neuf heures, nine hours ; nine o'clock. 
 
 4, 
 
 5, 6, 
 
 8, 
 
 10. 
 
 un, une, deux, trois, quatre, cinq, six, sept, huit, neuf, dix. 
 
 
 32. A V Ecole. {To School.) 
 
 Quel jour est-ce aujourd'hui ? 
 
 What day is it to-day. 
 
 C^st aujourd'hui lundi. 
 
 It is to-day Monday. 
 
 II est neuf heures. 
 
 It is nine o'clock. 
 
 Je vais a l'ecole. 
 
 I am going to school. 
 
 Quels livres as-tu la ? 
 
 What books have yon there ? • 
 
 Ce sont mes livres. 
 
 They are my books. 
 
 Quelles lecons avons-nous ? 
 
 What lessons have we ? 
 
 
THE DAYS OF THE WEEK. 33 
 
 33, Vocabulary, 
 
 dimanche, Sunday ; combien (de), how much, how many ; 
 
 lundi, Monday ; une legon de musique, a music lesson ; 
 
 mardi, Tuesday ; l'eglise {for la eglise), the church ; 
 
 mercredi, Wednesday ; je prends, I take ; 
 
 jeudi, Thursday ; je vais voir, I go to see ; 
 
 vendredi, Friday ; je recois, I receive ; 
 
 samedi, Saturday ; je sors, I go out. 
 
 34. Les Jours de la Semaine. (The Days of the Week.) 
 Combien de jours a une semaine ? 
 
 How many days has a week? 
 
 Une semaine a sept jours. 
 
 A week has seven days. 
 
 Le dimanche je vais a l'eglise. 
 
 (On) Sunday I go to church. 
 
 Le lundi je vais a l'ecole. 
 
 Monday I go to school. 
 
 Le mardi je prends une lecon de musique. 
 
 Tuesday I take a music lesson. 
 
 Le mercredi je vais voir ma tante. 
 
 Wednesday I go to see my aunt. 
 
 Le jeudi je recois mes amis. 
 
 Thursday I receive my friends. 
 
 Le vendredi je sors avec mam an. 
 
 Friday I go out with mamma. 
 
 Le samedi je vais a la promenade avec papa. 
 
 Saturday I go for a walk with papa. 
 
 35 , je te vols, I see you. 
 
 me (m'), me, to me ; nous, us, to us ; 
 
 te (f), thee, to thee (you) ; vous, you, to you. 
 2* 
 
• 34 
 
 IN THE PARLOR. 
 
 36. Vocabulary. 
 
 bonjour, good day; good inorn- ete, been; achete, bought; 
 
 ing; dit, said; told; 
 
 ce matin, this morning; quelque chose, something, any- 
 
 une rue, a street; thing; 
 
 un pont, a bridge; cela, that; le, it, so; 
 
 un magasin, a store; n'est-ce pas ? is it not ? 
 
 37. An Salon. (Li the Parlor.) 
 
 Bonjour, monsieur Lambert. Je vous ai vu ce matin. 
 
 Good day, Mister Lambert. I you have seen this morning. 
 
 Bonjour, Marie. Ou m'as-tu vu ? 
 
 Good day, Mary. Where me have you seen ? 
 
 Je vous ai vu dans la rue du Pont. 
 
 I yon have seen in Bridge street. 
 
 J'ai ete dans les magasins avec mon oncle. 
 
 I have been in the stores with my uncle. 
 
 Je le sais. II t'a achete quelque chose ; n'est-ce pas ? 
 
 I it know. He you has bought something ; is it not ? 
 
 Qui vous a dit cela ? 
 
 Who to you has told that ? 
 
 Tu l'as dit aux enfants, et ils me Font dit. 
 
 You it have told to the children, and they me it have told. 
 
THE PRESENT. 35 
 
 38, Vocabulary, 
 
 un cadeau, a present; parler, to speak; 
 
 une bague, a finger-ring; frangais, French; 
 
 un porte-crayon, a pencil-case; il faut, it is necessary, must; 
 
 lui, to him, to her; leur, to them; dire, to say; to tell; 
 
 fait, made, done; rien (ne), nothing, not any thing, 
 
 je crois que (qu'), I believe that; pour, for; aussi, also, too. 
 
 39. Le Cadeau, {The Present.) 
 
 Charles, mon oncle m'a fait un cadeau. 
 
 Charles, uncle to me has made a present. 
 
 II t'a achete une bague. Elise me l'a dit. 
 
 He to you has bought a ring. Eliza to me it has told. 
 
 II ne faut rien dire a Henriette. 
 
 You must not say anything to Henrietta. 
 
 II ne lui a rien achete. 
 
 He for her has nothing bought. 
 
 Pour qui a-t-il achete le joli porte-crayon? 
 
 For whom has he bought the pretty pencil-case f 
 
 Je crois qu'il l'a achete pour ton frere. 
 
 I believe that he it has bought for your brother. 
 
 Le voila, et ta sceur Anne aussi. Je vais leur parler 
 
 There he is, and your sister Ann too. T am going to them to speak. 
 
 II faut parler francais. 
 
 You must speak French. 
 
 40, du, de la, de 11, des, some or any. 
 
 du pain, some bread; de l'eau, some water; 
 
 de la viande, some meat; des oranges, some oranges. 
 
36 
 
 AT BREAKFAST. 
 
 41. Vocabulary, 
 
 j'aifaim, (I have hunger) I amhungry; oui,s'il vous plait, yes, if you please; 
 j'ai soif, (I have thirst) I am thirsty ; non, je vous remercie, no, I thank 
 veux-tu ? wilt thou ? (will you you ; [est ; 
 
 have) ; je bois, I drink ; tubois, thou driuk- 
 
 du beurre, butter ; du lait, milk ; j'aime le lait, I like milk. 
 
 42. A Dejeuner. (At Breakfast.) 
 
 j'ai faim. 
 
 I am hungry. 
 
 Bonjour, papa et mam an 
 
 Good morning, papa and mamma ; 
 
 Moi aussi, maman ; j'ai faim et soif. 
 
 I too, mamma; I am hungry and thirsty. 
 
 Voila du pain et du beurre, mes enfants. 
 
 There is — bread and — butter, my children. 
 
 Yeux-tu de la viande, Charles? 
 
 Charles 
 
 Non 
 
 No, 
 
 Will you have some meat, 
 
 Non, maman ; je vous remercie. 
 
 No, mamma, I you thank. (T thank you.) 
 
 Bois-tu du lait, Marie ? 
 
 Do you drink — milk, Mary? 
 
 vous plait 
 
 you please. 
 
 
 maman 
 
 mamma : 
 
 de l'eau, s'il 
 
 — — water, if 
 
 Je n'aime pas le lait. 
 
 I — like not — milk. 
 
 (Ida not like milk.) 
 
AFTER THE MEAL. 37 
 
 43. Vocabulary. 
 
 le dejeuner, the breakfast ; un oeuf, an egg ; 
 
 dejeune, breakfasted ; des ceufs, some eggs; 
 
 mange, eaten ; bu, drunk ; 
 
 du fruit, some fruit ; eu, had. 
 
 44. Apres le Mepas. (After the Meal.) 
 
 J'ai bien dejeune. 
 
 I have well breakfasted. 
 
 Qu'as-tu mange ? 
 
 What have you eaten ? 
 
 J'ai mange clu pain et de la viancle. 
 
 I have eaten — bread and — — meat. 
 
 J'ai bit de l'eau. 
 
 I have drunk — — water. 
 
 Nous avons eu des ceufs. 
 
 We have had some eggs. 
 
 Le petit Henri a mange un ceuf. 
 
 —r Little Henry ' has eaten an egg. 
 
 Avez-vous eu du fruit ? 
 
 Have you had any fruit? 
 
 Nous avons eu des oranges. 
 
 We have had — oranges. 
 
 J'aime les oranges. 
 
 I like — oranges. 
 
 45. de bon, some good ; pas de t not any. 
 
 du gateau, some cake ; un couteau, a knife ; 
 
 de bon gateau, some good cake ; pas de couteau, no knife ; 
 
 pas de gateau, not any cake ; des couteaux, knives ; 
 
 pas de gateaux, no cakes ; de bons couteaux, good knives. 
 
38 
 
 AT A PICNIC. 
 
 46. Vocabulary. 
 
 une pomme, an apple ; un verre, a glass ; une tasse, a cup ; 
 
 une poire, a pear ; une corbeille, a basket ; 
 
 de la gelee, some jelly ; nous voulons, we will ; we wisli ; 
 
 une fourchette, a fork ; gouter,to lunch. 
 
 47. En Pique-Nique. {At a Picnic.) 
 
 Nous voulons gouter ici sous les arbres. 
 
 We will lunch here under the trees. 
 
 J'ai apporte de bon gateau et de bonne gelee. 
 
 I have Drought some good cake and — — jelly. 
 
 Charles a apporte des pommes et des poires. 
 
 Charles has brought — apples 
 
 and — 
 
 pears. 
 
 Je n'ai pas de couteau. Ou sont les fourchettes ? 
 
 I —have no — knife, Where are the forks? 
 
 Nous n'avons pas apporte de fourchettes. 
 
 We — have not brought any forks. 
 
 Qui a les verres et les tasses? 
 
 Who has the glasses and — cups ? 
 
 Marie les a dans sa corbeille. 
 
 Mary them has in her basket. 
 
A T THE BANQ UET. 39 
 
 48. Vocabulary, 
 
 du sucre, sugar; chercher, to seek, to look for; 
 
 un morceau, a piece; je vais chercher, I am going for; 
 
 un citron, a lemon; j'ai ete chercher, I have been for; 
 
 une cuillere, a spoon; mais, but; 
 
 un ruisseau, a brook; pardon, I beg your pardon. 
 
 49. Au Banquet. {At the Banquet.) 
 
 Veux-tu un morceau de gateau avec de la gelee ? 
 
 Will you have a piece of cake with — — jelly ? 
 
 Oui ; mais je n'ai pas de verre. 
 
 Yes; but I —have no — glass. 
 
 Voila des tasses sur le bane. 
 
 There are — cups on the bench. 
 
 J'ai bu une tasse de bon lait. 
 
 I have drunk a cup of good milk. 
 
 Yas-tu chercher de l'eau ? 
 
 Are you going for — — water ? 
 
 J'ai ete chercher de l'eau au ruisseau. 
 
 I have been for — — water at the brook. 
 
 Avons-nous du sucre et des citrons ? 
 
 Have we — sugar and — lemons ? 
 
 Oui ; mais nous n'avons pas de cuilleres. 
 
 Yes ; but we — have no — spoons. 
 
 Pardon ; nous avons de petites cuilleres. 
 
 I beg your pardon ; we have some small spoons. 
 
 50. moi t I, me ; a moi, to me. 
 
 moi, I, me; nous, we, us; 
 
 toi, thou, thee; vous, you; 
 
 lui, he, him; eux, ) 
 
 elle, she, her; elles,f ^' ' 
 
40 
 
 THE DANCE ON THE SWARD. 
 
 51. Vocabulary. 
 
 nous allons, we are going; la balle, the ball (plaything) \ 
 
 danser, to dance; jouer, to play; 
 
 danse, danced; jouer a la balle, to play at ball; 
 
 l'herbe (for la herbe), the grass; souvent, often; viens, come. 
 
 52. La Danse SUV la JPelouse. (The Dance on the Sward.) 
 
 Nous allons danser sur l'herbe. 
 
 We are going to dance on the grass. 
 
 Viens, Caroline ; veux-tu danser avec moi ? 
 
 Come, Caroline; will you dance with me? 
 
 Voila raon cousin. Je vais danser avec lui. 
 
 There is my cousin. I am going to dance with him. 
 
 Elle ne veut pas danser avec toi. 
 
 She — will not dance with you. 
 
 J'ai souvent danse avec elle. 
 
 I have often danced with her. 
 
 Nous voulons jouer a la balle. 
 
 We will play at — ball. 
 
 Viens ; veux-tu jouer avec nous ? 
 
 Come; will yon play with ns? 
 
 Je vais jouer avec eux. 
 
 I am going to play with them. 
 
THE RETURN. 41 
 
 53. Vocabulary. 
 
 chez, to, or at, the house of; y, there; 
 
 chez moi, to, or at, my house; ily est, he is there; 
 
 chez toi, to, or at, thy house; nous y allons, we are going there; 
 
 chez lui, to, or at, his house; vous allez, you are going; 
 
 chez elle, to, or at, her house; ils vont, they go; they are going; 
 
 chez mon oncle, at my uncle's; retourner, to return; to go back. 
 
 54. Le Hetour. {The Return.) 
 
 Nous allons retourner chez nous. 
 
 We arc going to return home. 
 
 Je vais chez moi. 
 
 I am going to my house. 
 
 Tu vas chez toi ; n ? est-ce pas? 
 
 You are going to yourhouse;— are you not? 
 
 Henri va chez lui, et Jules y va avec lui. 
 
 Henry is going to his house, and Julius there goes with him. 
 
 Julie va chez sa tante ; sa mere y est. 
 
 Julia is going to her aunt's ; her mother there is. 
 
 Vous allez chez vous ; c'est bien. 
 
 You are going to your home ; that is well. 
 
 Nous y allons avec vous. 
 
 We there are going with you. 
 
 Nos amis y vont aussi. 
 
 Our friends there go too. 
 
 55* en, some or any (of it, of them). 
 
 j'en ai, I have some; il y a, there is; there are; 
 
 vous en avez, you have some; y a-t-tf ? is there ? are there ? 
 
 en a-t-il ? has he any ? il n'y a pas, there is not; 
 
 il n'en a pas, he has not (any); n'y a-t-il pas? is there not? 
 
 L 
 
43 
 
 AT WORK. 
 
 56. Vocabulary. 
 
 du fil, thread; du cotoa, cotton 
 du fil de coton, cotton thread; 
 de la soie, silk; 
 du fil de soie, silk thread ; 
 noir, noire, black; 
 
 blanc, blanche, white; 
 
 du fil blanc, white thread; 
 
 de la soie blanche, white silk; 
 
 je fais, I do, I make; 
 
 tu fais, thou doest ; thou inakest 
 
 57. A VOuvrage. {At Work.) 
 
 Qu'est-ce que tu fais ? 
 
 What is it that you are making ? 
 
 Je fais quelque chose de joli. 
 
 I am making something — pretty. 
 
 II me faut du fil noir ; en as-tu? 
 
 I want some thread black ; any have you ? 
 
 J'en ai. II y en a dans mon cabas. 
 
 I some have. there some is in my bag. 
 
 II y en a du noir et du blanc. 
 
 There some is — black and — white. 
 
 Y a-t-il du fil de soie ? 
 
 Is there — thread of silk ? 
 
 II y en a de soie et de coton. 
 
 There some is of silk and of cotton. 
 
 
 
THE CANARY BIRDS. 
 
 43 
 58. Vocabulary. 
 
 un serin, a canary bird; en haut, up-stairs; 
 
 un oiseau, a bird; en bas, dowu-stairs; 
 
 une cage, a cage; quelqu'un, somebody, anybody; 
 
 sorti, sortie, gone out; personne (ne), nobody, not anybody. 
 
 59. Les Serins. {The Canaiy Birds.) 
 
 Y a-t-il un serin dans cette cage ? 
 
 Is there a canary bird in that cage ? 
 
 II y en a deux. 
 
 There — are two. 
 
 Ma tante aime les oiseaux ; elle en a cinq. 
 
 My aunt likes — birds ; she — has five. 
 
 Elle est en haut, dans sa chambre. 
 
 She is up-stairs, in her room. 
 
 Ma mere y est aussi. 
 
 My mother there is too. 
 
 Tes soeurs y sont-elles ? 
 
 Your sisters there are they? 
 
 Non ; elles n'y sont pas. 
 
 No ; they —there are not. 
 
 Julie est en bas, et Marie est sortie. 
 
 Julia is down-stairs, and Mary is out. 
 
 Y a-t-il quelqu'un au salon ? 
 
 Is there anybody in the parlor? 
 
 Non ; il n'y a personne. 
 
 No ; there is nobody. 
 
 60. plus grand, taller ; aussi grand, as tall. 
 
 plus grand, larger, taller; aussi grand, as large, as tall; 
 
 plus petit, smaller; pas aussi grand, not so large; 
 
 que, than, as. 
 
44 
 
 UNDER THE TREES. 
 
 OJ, Vocabulary . 
 
 Page, the age; jeune, young; 
 
 quel age as-tu ? how old art thou ? fort, forte, strong; 
 
 j'ai dix ans, I am ten years old; plus fort que lui, stronger than he; 
 
 age, agee, old, aged; aussi fort que lui, as strong as he. 
 
 62. SOUS les Arbres. (Under the Trees.) 
 
 Charles, es-tu plus age que ton cousin? 
 
 Charles, are you older than your cousin ? 
 
 Non ; je suis plus jeune que lui. 
 
 No ; I am younger than he. 
 
 Mais il est aussi grand que moi. 
 
 But he is as tall as I. 
 
 Quel age as-tu ? 
 
 How old are you ? 
 
 J'ai neuf ans, et mon cousin en a dix. 
 
 I am nine years, and my cousin — is ten. 
 
 Es-tu aussi fort que lui ? 
 
 Are you as strong as he? 
 
 Oh oui ; il n'est pas aussi fort que moi. 
 
 Oh yea; he — ie nut eo strong as I. 
 
THE RAGE. 
 
 45 
 
 6*5. Vocabulary, 
 
 je peux, I can ; tu peux, thou canst; j'etudie, I study, I am studying; 
 
 courir, to run; 
 vite, fast, quick; 
 beaucoup,mucb, many; 
 autant, as much, as many; 
 pas autant, not so much; 
 
 tu etudies, thou studiest; 
 il etudie, he studies; 
 avance, advanced; 
 pourquoi, why; 
 parce que. because. 
 
 64. La Course. {The Race.) 
 
 Peux-tu courir aussi vite que lui? 
 
 Can you run as fast as he? 
 
 Je peux courir plus vite que lui. 
 
 I can run faster than he. 
 
 Es-tu aussi avance dans tes etudes ? 
 
 Are you as far advanced in your studies ? 
 
 Non ; il est plus avance que moi. 
 
 No ; he is farther advanced than I. 
 
 Pourquoi est-il plus avance que toi ? 
 
 Why is he farther advanced than you? 
 
 Parce qu'il etudie plus que moi. 
 
 Because he studies more than I. 
 
 N'etudies-tu pas beaucoup ? 
 
 Do you not study much? 
 
 Si ; mais pas autant que Charles. 
 
 Yes : but not so much as Charles. 
 
 65. mon, my ; 
 
 le mi'dn, la mienne, j 
 
 les miens, les miennes, f mme » 
 
 le tien, la tienne, \ 
 
 les tiens, les tiennes, \ tlline ' ^ ours ^ 
 
 le sien, la sienne, i 
 
 les siens, les siennes, f his ' liers > its; 
 
 le mien, mine. 
 
 le notre, la notre, 
 les notres, 
 Iev6tre,lav6tre,) ourg; 
 ' les votres, ) 
 
 leleur ' laleur 'i theirs, 
 les leurs, ) 
 
46 
 
 MINE AND THINE. 
 
 66. Vocabulary. 
 
 un mouchoir, a handkerchief; laisse, left; 
 une ombrelle, a parasol; pris, taken; 
 
 des gants, gloves; a qui est ? to whom belongs ? whose is ? 
 
 67, Le Mien et le Tien. (Mine and Thine.) 
 
 A qui est ce mouchoir? 
 
 To whom belongs this handkerchief ? 
 
 II est a moi. 
 
 It belongs to me. 
 
 Pardon ; c'est le mien. Julie a pris le tien. 
 
 I beg your pardon ; it is mine. Julia has taken yours. 
 
 Voila le sien, sur la chaise. 
 
 There is — hers upon the chair. 
 
 Tu as mon ombrelle ; Anne a la tienne. 
 
 You have my parasol ; Ann has yours. 
 
 Elle a laisse* la sienne en haut. 
 
 She has left hers np-stairs. 
 
 A qui sont ces gants ? 
 
 To whom belong these gloves ? 
 
 Je crois que ce sont les miens. 
 
 I believe that they are mine. 
 
THE NEW CLOTHES. 47 
 
 68, Vocabulary, 
 
 un chapeau, a hat; a bonnet; beau, bel, ) beautiful, fine, 
 
 un habit, a coat; belle, ) handsome; 
 
 une robe, a dress f nouveau, nouvel, j 
 
 une cravate, a cravat; ' nouvelle, ! 
 
 des souliers, shoes; vieux, vieil, ) , , 
 
 des bottines, ladies' boots; vieille, ) 
 
 69, Les NouveailX Habits. {The New Clothes.) 
 
 Ton nouveau chapeau est beau. 
 
 Your new bonnet is beautiful. 
 
 II est plus beau que le mien. 
 
 It is more beautiful than mine. 
 
 Ce nouvel habit est beau ; c'est un tres-bel habit 
 
 This new coat is fine ; it is a very fine coat. 
 
 Sa nouvelle robe est aussi belle que la tienue. 
 
 Her new dress is as beautiful as yours. 
 
 Voila de belles cravates de soie. 
 
 There are some fine cravats of silk. 
 
 A qui sont ces vieux souliers? 
 
 To whom belong these old shoes ? 
 
 Yos vieilles bottines sont en bas avec les n6tres. 
 
 Your old boots are down-stairs with onrs. 
 
 lis ont une belle maison. 
 
 They have a handsome house. 
 
 La vOtre est aussi belle que la leur. 
 
 Yours is as handsome as theirs. 
 
 70, celui, the one; lequel, which one. 
 
 celui, celle, that, the one; lequel, la quelle, which one; 
 
 ceux, celles, those; lesquels, lesqueJJ.es, which ones. 
 
48 
 
 THE CHOICE. 
 
 71* Vocabulary. 
 
 des bas, stockings; le plus, the most; 
 
 de la laine, wool; il plait, it pleases; 
 
 meilleur, meilleure, better, best; tu trouves, thou f 
 mieux, le mieux, better, the best; neuf, neuve, new. 
 
 72. Le Choix. (Tlie Choice.) 
 
 Mon chapeau est neuf ; celui de Julie est vieux. 
 
 My bonnet is new; that of Julia is old. 
 
 Lequel est le meilleur ? 
 
 Which one is the best ? 
 
 Ma robe est de soie : celle de Marie est de laine. 
 
 My 
 
 of silk ; 
 
 that of Mary 
 
 of wool. 
 
 Laquelle te plait le mieux ? 
 
 Which one to you pleases — best ? 
 
 Yoici des bas cle coton ? et voila des bas cle laine. 
 
 Here are — stockings of cotton, and there are — stockings of wool. 
 
 Lesquels veux-tu, ceux de coton, ou ceux de laine ? 
 
 Which ones will you have, those of cotton, or those of wool ? 
 
 Yoici mes ba«;ues, et voila celles de Marie. 
 
 Here are my rings, and there are those of Mary. 
 
 Lesquelles trouves-tu les plus jolies ? 
 
 Which ones do you find the prettiest ? 
 
THESE AND THOSE. 49 
 
 73. Vocabulary. 
 
 cet homme-ci, this man ; cette femme-ci, this woman ; 
 
 cet homme-la, that man ; cette femme-la, that woman ; 
 
 celui-ci, this one, celui la, that one; celle-ci, this one; celle-la, that one 
 ces enfants-ci, these children ; ces femmes-ci, these women ; 
 
 ces enfants-la, those children ; ces femmes-la, those women ; 
 ceux-ci, these ; ceux-la, those ; celles-ci, these ; celles-la, those ; 
 
 r 
 
 74. Ceux-ci et ceUX-la, {These and Those.) 
 
 Cet habit-ci est a moi ; celui-la est a Jules. 
 
 This coat belongs to me ; that one belongs to Julius. 
 
 J'aime mieux celui-ci que celui-la. 
 
 I like better this one than that one. 
 
 Cette robe-ci est cle soie ; celle-la est de laine. 
 
 This dress — is of silk ; that one is of wool. 
 
 Celle-ci me plait mieux que celle-la. 
 
 This one to me pleases better than that one. 
 
 Ces bas-ci sont cle cotou ; ceux-la sont cle laine. 
 
 These stockings are of cotton; those — are of wool. 
 
 Ceux-ci sont meilleurs que ceux-la. 
 
 These — are better than those. — 
 
 Ces tasses-ci sont plus jolies que celles-la. 
 
 These cups — are prettier than those. — 
 
 J'aime mieux celles-ci que celles-la. 
 
 Hike better these — than those. — 
 
 75. line fois, once ; deux fois, twice. 
 
 autre, other ; quelque, some ; quelques, a few 
 
 chaque, each ; every ; tout, toute, ) 
 
 meme, same ; tons, toutes, [ a11 ' ever ^' wllole; 
 
 plusiexirs, several ; tout le monde, everybody ; 
 3 
 
50 
 
 THE SALUTATION. 
 
 76, Vocabulary. 
 
 qui, who, which, that ; chaque fois, or toutes les fois, every 
 
 que, whom, which, that ; time ; 
 
 dont, of whom, of which, whose; il salue, he bows to ; salue, bowed; 
 
 a qui, to whom; mort, died; dead; 
 
 tous les jours, every day ; il est mort, he died; he is dead. 
 
 77. Le Salut. {The Salutation) 
 
 Connais-tu la dame qui nous a saluees ? 
 
 Do you know the lady who us has bowed to ? 
 
 C'est la m§me dame que tu as vue cliez nous. 
 
 It is the same lady whom you have seeu at our house. 
 
 C'est elle dont l'enfant est mort ily a quelques jours. 
 
 It is she of whom the child has died ago a few days. 
 
 Yoila un monsieur qui salue tout le monde. 
 
 There is a gentleman who bows to everybody. 
 
 C'est un monsieur que je vois tous les jours. 
 
 That is a gentleman whom I see every day. 
 
 C'est celui dont mon pere a parle a table. 
 
 It is he of whom my father has spoken at table. 
 
 II a plusieurs filles que je connais toutes. 
 
 He has several daughters whom I know all. 
 
 Je les vois chaque fois que je vais voir ma tante. 
 
 I them see every time that I go to see my aunt. 
 
AN ACQ UAINTANCE. 51 
 
 78. Vocabulary. 
 
 alle, allee, gone; seul, seule, alone ; 
 
 arrive, arrivee, arrived ; ensemble, together ; 
 
 parti, partie, left ; quand, when ; 
 
 reste, restee, remained ; hier, yesterday ; 
 
 venu, venue, come ; la matinee, the morning , 
 
 je viens, I come ; la campagne, the country ; 
 
 il vient, he comes ; la connaissance, the acquaintance; 
 
 de, from ; of ; mes parents, my parents. 
 
 79. Une Connaissance. (An Acquaintance.) 
 Voila un monsieur qui vient souvent nous voir. 
 
 There is a gentleman who comes often us to see. 
 
 C'est une connaissance de mon oncle. 
 
 It is an acquaintance of my uncle. 
 
 Je Pai vu chez mon oncle quand j ; y suis alle. 
 
 I him have seen at my uncle's when I there have* gone. 
 
 lis sont venus ensemble de Paris. 
 
 They have* come together from Paris. 
 
 lis sont arrives ici, il y a quelques semaines. 
 
 They have* arrived here, ago a few weeks. 
 
 Mes parents sont partis pour la campagne. 
 
 My parents have* left for the country. 
 
 Mes soeurs sont sorties ; Charles estseulalamaison 
 
 My sisters have* gone out ; Charles is alone at — home. 
 
 Je suis reste chez moi toute la matinee. 
 
 I have* remained at home all the morning. 
 
 80. quelqu'un, somebody ; pevsonne, nobody. 
 
 aucun (ne), no one ; on, some one, people, they ; 
 
 chacun, every one ; tout, everything. 
 
 * Notice that the French say in these phrases, I am, toe are, they are, etc., and 
 the English, 1 have, we have, they have, etc. 
 
52 
 
 THE VISIT. 
 
 une personne, a person ; 
 
 une adresse, an address ; 
 
 un eleve, une eleve, a scholar ; 
 
 une classe, a class ; 
 
 une question, a question ; 
 
 81, Vocabulary, 
 
 repondre a, to answer ; 
 ; manque, missed ; donner, to give ; 
 
 demander, to ask for ; 
 demeurer, to reside ; to live ; 
 sonne, rung ; ouvert, opened. 
 
 82, La ViSlte. (The Visit.) 
 
 On a soune, et personne n'a ouvert la porte. 
 
 Some one has rung (the bell has rung), and nobody has opened the door. 
 
 Pardon ; la fille y est allee. 
 
 I beg your pardon ; the girl there has gone. 
 
 On demande quelqu'un qui ne demeure pas id 
 
 They ask for somebody who — lives not here. 
 
 Je connais la personne dont on demande l'adresse. 
 
 I know the person of whom they ask the address. 
 
 Aucun eleve n'a su repondre a cette question. 
 
 No scholar — has known how to answer — this question. 
 
 On l'a faite a chacun ; toute la classe Fa manquee. 
 
 They it have made to everyone ; all the class it has missed. 
 
 Je sais tout 
 
 I know all ; 
 
 on m'a tout dit. 
 
 they to me have everything told. 
 
 
ON HORSEBACK AND IN A CARRIAGE. 53 
 
 83. Vocabulary. 
 
 Tin voisin, a neighbor ; jusque, jusqu'a, till, until ; 
 
 une voiture, a carriage ; demain, to morrow ; rester, to stay ; 
 
 un mois, a month ; cette apres-midi, this afternoon ; 
 
 depuis, since ; ils parlent, they speak ; 
 
 pendant, during, for ; ils sortent, they go out ; 
 
 longtemps, a long time ; ils viennent, they come. 
 
 84. A Cheval et en Voiture. {On Horseback and in a Carriage. 
 
 Nos voisins ont ete a Paris. 
 
 Our neighbors have been in Paris. 
 
 Ils y ont demeure pendant longtemps. 
 
 They there have resided for a long time. 
 
 Leurs enfants parlent francais anssi bienque votis. 
 
 Their children speak French as well as yon. 
 
 Us demeurent ici depuis quelques mois. 
 
 They live {have lived) here since a few months. 
 
 Us sortent tous les jours en voiture. 
 
 They go out every day in a carriage {drive out). 
 
 Nous demeurons ici depuis longtemps. 
 
 We live [have lived) here — a long time. 
 
 Mes cousins viennent ici cette apres-midi. 
 
 My cousins come here this afternoon. 
 
 Us viennent a cheval, et vont rester jusqu'a demain. 
 
 They come on horseback, and are going to stay until — to-morrow. 
 
 85. se lever (to raise one's self), to rise. 
 
 je me leve, (raise myself) I rise ; nous nous levons, we rise j 
 
 tu te leves, thou risest ; vous vous levez, you rise ; 
 
 il se leve, he rises ; ils se levent, > 
 
 elle se leve, she rises ; elles se levent, \ they rise * 
 
54 
 
 SUNRISE. 
 
 je me couche, I go to bed ; 
 je me lave, I wash myself ; 
 je m'habille, I dress myself 
 leve, risen ; habille, dressed 
 il s'est leve, lie has risen ; 
 rentrer, to come in: 
 
 86. Vocabulary. 
 
 de bonne heure, early ; tard, late : 
 
 bientot, soon ; deja, already ; 
 
 encore, still ; pas encore, not yet ; 
 
 il dort, he sleeps ; 
 
 maintenant, now ; 
 
 le lit, the bed ; au lit, in bed. 
 
 87. Le Lever du Soleil. (Sunrise. ) 
 
 Je me leve au lever du soleil. 
 
 I rise at sunrise. 
 
 Henri se couche de bonne heure, et se leve tard, 
 
 Henry goes to bed early and rises late. 
 
 II est encore au lit ; il dort jnsqu'a huit heures. 
 
 He is still in bed; he sleeps till — eight o'clock. 
 
 Jules est leve, mais il n'est pas encore habille. 
 
 Julius is up, but he — is not yet 
 
 dressed. 
 
 up, but ne — is not 
 
 Charles s'est lave ; il s'habille maintenant. 
 
 Charles has washed himself; he is dressing now. 
 
 Mon pere est leve et sorti depuis longtemps. 
 
 My father is up and (has) gone out since long (long since). 
 
 II va bientot rentrer pour dejeuner. 
 
 He is going goon to come in to breakfast. 
 
THE DEPARTURE. 55 
 
 88. Vocabulary. 
 
 j'avais, I had; il avait, lie had ; avant, devant, before ; 
 
 j'etais, I was; il etait, he was ; apres, after ; 
 
 j'ai froid, (1 7iave cold) I am cold ; mal a la t&te, a headache ; 
 
 il fait froid, it (makes) is cold ; mal a. la gorge, sore throat 
 
 il faisait froid, it was cold ; mal aux dents, toothache ; 
 
 je dois, I must, I am to ; descendre, come down ; 
 
 je devais, I was to ; tout de suite, immediately 
 
 sortir, to go out ; partir, to leave ; trop, too ; too much. 
 
 89. Le Depart. {The Departure.) 
 
 Je dois rester ici ; il fait trop froid pour sortir. 
 
 I must remain here ; it is too cold to go out. 
 
 Je me suis leve ce matin avant six heures. 
 
 I — have risen this morning before six o'clock. 
 
 Je me suis lave et je suis descendu tout de suite. 
 
 I myself have washed and I have come down immediately. 
 
 Ma soeur etait deja au salon. 
 
 My sister was already in the parlor. 
 
 Elle devait partir apres le dejeuner. 
 
 She was to leave after — breakfast. 
 
 La voiture etait devant la porte. 
 
 The carriage was before the door. 
 
 II faisait si froicl, et elle avait mal a la gorge. 
 
 It was so cold, and she had a sore throat. 
 
 Moi, j'avais mal aux dents. 
 
 — I had toothache. 
 
 Ma mere avait mal a la tete. 
 
 My mother had a headache. 
 
 90. avoir, to have ; Stre, to be. 
 nous avions, we had ; nous etions, we were ; 
 
 vous aviez, you had ; vous etiez, you were ; 
 
 ils avaient, they had. ils etaient, they were. 
 
56 
 
 ON THE ICE. 
 
 91. Vocabulary. 
 
 le plaisir, the pleasure ; passe, passed ; bon train, at a good 
 
 la glace, the ice; un patin, a skate ; j'ai chaud, I {have) am warm ; [rate ; 
 un traineau, a sleigh ; nous courions, we were running ; 
 
 je patine, I skate, I am skating ; nous nous sommes amuses, we 
 je patinais, I was skating ; amused o. s. 
 
 92. Sur la Glace. (On the ice.) 
 Hier, nous avions du plaisir; nous etions sur la glace. 
 
 Yesterday, we had — pleasure; we were on the ice. 
 
 Nos amis y etaient avec nous. 
 
 Our friends there were with us. 
 
 lis avaient leurs patins ; ils patinaient. 
 
 They had their skates ; they were skating. 
 
 Yous nous avez passes ; vous etiez en traineau. 
 
 You us have passed ; you were in a sleigh. 
 
 Yous alliez bien ; vous aviez de bons chevaux. 
 
 You were going well ; you had — good horses. 
 
 Nous allions bon train ; mais nous avions froid. 
 
 We went along at a good rate; but we were cold. 
 
 Nous avions chaud ; nous courions toujours. 
 
 We were warm ; we were running continually. 
 
 Nous nous sommes bien amuses. 
 
 We ourselves have well amused. 
 
THE WEATHER. 57 
 
 93, Vocabulary, 
 
 il fait mauvais temps, it is bad le trottoir, the sidewalk ; 
 weather ; couvert de, covered with ; 
 
 il pleut, it rains; il gele, it freezes; la nuit, the night ; passee, past ; 
 il neige, it snows; neige, snowed; le bruit, the noise ; 
 la neige, the snow ; la cheminee, the chimney ; 
 
 la pluie, the rain ;le vent, the wind; ce qui, ce que, (that which) what. 
 
 94, Le Temps. (The Weather.) 
 
 II fait mauvais temps ; il pleut. 
 
 It is bad weather; it rains. 
 
 Hier il faisait froid ; il gelait. 
 
 Yesterday it was cold; it froze. 
 
 La nuit passee il a neige. 
 
 The night past (last night) it has snowed. 
 
 Ce matin les trottoirs 6taient couverts de neige. 
 
 This morning the sidewalks were covered with snow. 
 
 J'aime mieux la neige que la pluie. 
 
 I like better — snow than — rain. 
 
 Savez-vous ce qui fait ce bruit ? 
 
 Do you know what makes that noise ? 
 
 Oui ; c'est le vent dans la cheminee. 
 
 Yes; it is the wind in the chimney. 
 
 II ne faut pas dire a Charles ce que je vous ai dit. 
 
 You must not tell — Charles what I to you have told. 
 
 95, shall or will. 
 
 j'aurai, I shall have ; je porterai, I shall or will carry ; 
 
 tu auras, thou wilt (you will) have; je ferai, I shall make or do ; 
 
 U aura, he will have ; je verrai, I shall see ; 
 
 je serai, I shall be ; j'iraij I shall go ; 
 
 tu seras, thou wilt (you will) be ; je viendrai, I shall come ; 
 
 il sera, he will be ; je recevrai, I shall receive. 
 3* 
 
58 
 
 MAMMA'S BIRTHDAY. 
 
 96. Vocabulary. 
 
 la f&te, tlie festival; the birthday 
 le bouquet, the nosegay ; 
 content, contente, pleased ; 
 heureux, heureuse, happy ; 
 
 gros, grosse, large ; big ; 
 
 je presenterai, 1 shall present 
 
 sourire, to smile ; 
 
 au nombre, among them. 
 
 97. La F6te de Mamail. {Mamma's Birthday.) 
 
 J'auraidu plaisir demain; ce sera la fete cle maraan. 
 
 I shall have — pleasure to-morrow; it will be — mamma's birthday. 
 
 Je ferai un gros bouquet que je lui presenterai. 
 
 I will make a large nosegay which I to her will present. 
 
 Je le porterai a sa chambre quand elle sera levee. 
 
 I it shall carry to her room when she has risen. 
 
 Elle sera bien contente quand elle me verra. 
 
 She will be well pleased when she me sees (trill see). 
 
 Et je serai heureuse quand je la verrai sourire. 
 
 And I shall be happy when I her (shall) see smile. 
 
 Je irirai pas a Fecole ; je resterai a la maison. 
 
 I — shall not go to — school ; I shall stay at — home. 
 
 Je recevrai mes amis ; tu seras au nombre. 
 
 I shall receive my friends ; you will be among them. 
 
 Tu viendras me voir avec tes parents. 
 
 You will come me to see with your parents. 
 
 1 
 
THE EVENING PARTY. 59 
 
 98. Vocabulary. 
 
 nous aurons, we shall have ; rejouir, to gladden ; 
 
 vous aurez, you will have ; pare, paree (de), adorned (with) ; 
 
 ils auront, they will have ; un bijou, a jewel ; 
 
 nous serons, we shall or will be ; une fleur, a flower ; 
 
 vous serez, you will be ; le comble, the height ; 
 
 ils seront, they will be ; le bonheur, happiness ; 
 
 feliciter, to congratulate ; 
 
 99. La Soir&e. {The Evening Party.) 
 
 Nous aurons du monde chez nous le soir. 
 
 We shall have — company at our house in the evening. 
 
 Tous nos amis y seront, et nous danserons. 
 
 All our friends there will be, and we shall dance. 
 
 Nous nous amuserons toute la soiree. 
 
 We ourselves shall amuse all the evening. 
 
 Mes cousins y viendront avec leurs parents. 
 
 My cousins there will come with their parents. 
 
 Vous les verrez ; vous ferez leur connaissance. 
 
 You them will see ; you will make their acquaintance. 
 
 On felicitera maman ; on lui r^jouira le coeur. 
 
 They will congratulate mamma ; they to her will gladden the heart. 
 
 Elle sera paree de bijoux et de fleurs. 
 
 She will be adorned with jewels and — flowers. 
 
 Et moi, je serai au comble du bonheur. 
 
 And as for me, I shall be at the height of happiness. 
 
 100. ale, have {thou) ; ayez, have (you) ; ayons, let us have. 
 
 sois, soyez, be ; fais, faites, do ; make ; 
 
 va, allez, go ; dis, dites, say ; tell ; 
 
 viens, venez, come ; soyons, let us be. 
 
60 THE GOVERNESS. 
 
 101, Vocabulary, 
 
 ecoute, ecoutez, listen ; je vous prie, I beg you ; 
 
 prends, prenez, take ; de vous dep&cher, to make haste 
 
 obeissons (a), let us obey ; son devoir, bis task ; 
 
 ayez soin, take care ; une chose, a thing ; 
 
 prenez garde, take care ; mind ; tranquille, quiet ; still ; 
 on touche, some one touches ; 
 
 102. La Gouvemante. (The Governess.) 
 
 Henri, va chercher ton livre et viens dire ta lecon. 
 
 Henry, go for your book and come (and) say your lesson. 
 
 Fais ton devoir avant d'aller jouer. 
 
 Do your task before to go (you go) to play. 
 
 Marie, allez trouver Charles, s'il vous plait. 
 
 Mary, go to (find) Charles, if you please. 
 
 Dites-lui qu'on le demands. 
 
 Tell him that some one him asks. 
 
 Ne lui dites pas que c est moi. 
 
 — Him tell not that it is I. 
 
 Faites-moi le plaisir de vous depecher. 
 
 Do me the pleasure to make haste. 
 
 Ne me faites pas attendre ; je vous en prie. 
 
 — Me make not wait; I you for it pray. 
 
 Faites attention a ce que je clis. 
 
 Make (pay) attention to what I say. 
 
 Ecoutez-moi bien, et restez tranquilles. 
 
 Listen to me well, and remain quiet (keep still). 
 
 Ayez soin de toutes mes choses, voulez-vous ? 
 
 Take care of all my things, will you? 
 
 Prenez garde qu'on n ? y touche. 
 
 Take care (mind) that no one to them touches. 
 
 Soyons raisonnables, et obeissons a notre 
 
 Let us be reasonable, and let us obey — our 
 
 gouvernante, 
 
 governess. 
 
PART SECOND. 
 
CHARLES AND MARY— Continued. 63 
 
 103, Vocabulary, 
 
 qui est-ce que ? whom ? le doigt, the finger ; 
 
 qu'est-ce qui? what ? contre, against; le mur, the wall; 
 
 qu'est-ce que ? what ? le tableau, the picture; 
 
 qu'est-ce que c'est ? What is that ? le milieu, the middle. 
 
 104, Charles et Marie, (Voir p. 20.) 
 
 Ou sont Charles et Marie ? 
 
 Where are Charles and Mary ? 
 
 lis sont la, a la table. 
 
 They are there, at the table. 
 
 Qu'est-ce qui est sur la table ? 
 
 What is (lies) on the table? 
 
 C'est la clef de Charles. 
 
 It is the key of Charles. 
 
 Qu'est-ce que Charles a au doigt ? 
 
 What has Charles at the finger? 
 
 II a le de de Marie au doigt. 
 
 He has the thimble of Mary at the finger. 
 
 Qui est-ce que vous voyez sur le sofa ? 
 
 Whom do you see on the sofa? 
 
 Je vois papa et maman sur le sofa. 
 
 I see papa and mamma, on the sofa. 
 
 Qu'est-ce que c'est la, contre le mur ? 
 
 What — is there, against the wall? 
 
 C'est un petit tableau. 
 
 It is a small picture. 
 
 Qu'est-ce qu'il y a au milieu de la chambre? 
 
 What is there in the middle of the room ? 
 
 II y a une table au milieu de la chambre. 
 
 There is a table in the middle of the room. 
 
64 FATHER, MOTHER AND CHILD— Continued. 
 
 105, Vocabulary, 
 
 le mari, the husband ; ouvrir, to open; ouvert, open ; 
 
 la femme, the wife ; pres de, near ; porter, to cany ; 
 
 une fendtre, a window ; a cote de, next to, by the side of. 
 
 106, Le P&re, la Mdre et l f Enfant, (Voir p. 22.) 
 
 Qu'est-ce qu'il y a pres du banc, sous cet arbre ? 
 
 What is there near the bench, under that tree ? 
 
 II y a un enfant, qui a une orange a la main. 
 
 There is a child, who has an orange in the hand. 
 
 Qui est cet homme, qui va la-bas ? 
 
 Who is that man, who is going yonder? 
 
 C'est le pere de Tenfant ; il va au jardin. 
 
 He is the father of the child ; he is going to the garden. 
 
 Est-ce que la porte du jardin est ouverte ? 
 
 Is it that the gate of the garden is open ? 
 
 Non ; mais il a la clef; il va l'ouvrir. 
 
 No ; but he has the key ; he is going it to open. 
 
 Et cette femme que voila ; qui est-elje ? 
 
 And that woman — there ; who is she ? 
 
 (Test la femme de Thomme, et la mere de l'enfant. 
 
 She is the wife of the man, and the mother of the child. 
 
 Ou va-t-elle avec son cabas ? 
 
 Where is she going with her satchel ? 
 
 Elle va porter son cabas dans la maison. 
 
 She is going to carry her satchel into the house. 
 
 Qu ? est-ce qu'il y a a cc>te de la porte de la maison ? 
 
 What is there next to the door of the house ? 
 
 II y a une petite fenetre a cote de la porte. 
 
 There is a little window nest to the door. 
 
HENR T'S BOA T— Contin ued. 6 5 
 
 107. Vocabulary. 
 
 comment, how ; une corde, a rope; 
 
 il tient, lie holds, lie is holding ; le genou, the knee; (les genoux.) 
 
 elle regarde, she is looking at ; le pont, the bridge; 
 
 attache, ee, attached; par ici, this way. 
 
 108. Le Bateau d> Henri. (Voir p. 24.) 
 
 Qu'est-ce que c'est que ces enfants-la ? 
 
 — Who are — those children? 
 
 C'est mon frere etmasoeur. 
 
 They are ray brother and — sister. 
 
 Comment s'appellent-ils ? 
 
 How are they called ? ( What are their names ?) 
 
 Mon frere s'appelle H. . . et ma soeur s'appelle J. . . 
 
 My brother is calied Henry, and my sister is called Julia. 
 
 Qu'est-ce qu' Henri tient a la main ? 
 
 What does Henry hold in his hand? 
 
 C'est une corcle, qui est attachee a son bateau. 
 
 It is a rope, which is attached to his boat. 
 
 Et Julie, que tient-elle sur ses genoux ? 
 
 And Julia, what is she holding on her knees ? 
 
 Elle tient une poupee sur ses genoux. 
 
 She is holding a doll on her knees. 
 
 Qu'est-ce qu'elle fait la avec sa poupee ? 
 
 What is she doing there with her doll ? 
 
 Elle joue avec, et regarde le bateau d'Henri. 
 
 She is playing with it, and is looking at the boat of Henry. 
 
 Qui est-ce que tu vois la-bas, sur le pont ? 
 
 Whom do you see yonder, on the bridge ? 
 
 C'est mon pere et ma mere, qui viennent par ici. 
 
 — My father and — mother, who are coming this way. 
 
66 
 
 THE DOG TURCO-Continued. 
 
 109, Vocabulary, 
 
 il est a, } je monte a cheval, I go on horse- 
 
 il appartient a, f xt belon S s to ' back ; dessus, upon it; 
 
 je monte, I go up, I ascend ; je monte dessus, I ride upon it. 
 
 110, Le Chien Turco. (Voir p. 26.) 
 
 Voila un beau chien, comment s'appelle-t-il ? 
 
 There is a beautiful dog, what is his name? 
 
 C'est le chien de mon oncle ; il s'appelle Turco. 
 
 That is the dog of my uncle ; his name is Turco. 
 
 A qui appartient cette belle vache ? 
 
 To whom belongs that beautiful cow ? 
 
 Cette vache-la appartient a ma tante. 
 
 That cow — belongs to my aunt. 
 
 Qu'est-ce que Julie tient dans ses bras ? 
 
 What is Julia holding in her arms ? 
 
 C'est un petit chat que ma tante lui a donne. 
 
 It is a kitten which my aunt to her has given. 
 
 Voila un joli petit cheval ; a qui appartient-il ? 
 
 There is a pretty little horse ; to whom does it belong ? 
 
 C'est mon cheval ; je monte dessus tous les jours. 
 
 That is my horse ; I ride upon it every day. 
 
 Connais-tu ce petit garcon et cette petite fille la-bas? 
 
 Do you know that little boy and that little girl yonder? 
 
 Oui ; le garcon est mon ami ; il vient me voir. 
 
 Yes ; the boy is my friend ; he comes me to see. 
 
 La petite fille est sasoeur; elle vient joueravec Julie. 
 
 The little girl is his sister ; she comes to play with Julia. 
 
 Nous voulons aller a l'eau avec mon petit bateau, 
 
 Wc will go to the water •with my little boat. 
 
THE WALK— Continued. 67 
 
 111. Vocabulary, 
 
 tournons, let us turn; une boite, a box ; 
 
 le cote, the side; on vend, they sell; 
 
 du cote de, towards; vendez-vous ? do you sell? 
 
 s'arr^ter, to stop; cela vaut, that is worth; 
 
 entrer (dans), to enter, to go in; un dollar, a dollar. 
 
 112, La Promenade, (Voir p. 28.) 
 
 II fait beau temps ce matin, allons a la promenade. 
 
 It is fine weather this morning ; let us go for a walk. 
 
 Tournons du cote des boulevards. 
 
 Let us turn towards the boulevards. 
 
 Voila un monsieur et une dame que tu connais. 
 
 There is a gentleman and — lady whom you know. 
 
 Ce sont nos voisins avec leurs enfants. 
 
 They are our neighbors with tUeir children. 
 
 11 y a beaucoup de monde devant ce magasin. 
 
 There are many people before that store. 
 
 Nous voulons y entrer et voir ce qu'on y vend. 
 
 We will (in) it enter and see what they there sell. 
 
 Qu'est-ce qu'il y a dans ces jolies boites-la? 
 
 What is in those pretty boxes ? 
 
 II y a des mouclioirs de poche dedans. 
 
 There are — pocket-handkerchiefs in them. 
 
 Voila un bel eventail ; combien le vendez-vous? 
 
 There is a handsome fan; how it do you sell? 
 
 Cet eventail vaut trois dollars avec la boite. 
 
 This fan is worth three dollars with the box. 
 
 S'il te plait, Marie, je te Tacheterai. 
 
 If it to you pleases, Mary, I to you it will buy. 
 
 Yous etes bien bon, mon oncle ; je vous remercie 
 
 You are very kind, — uncle; I you thank 
 
 beaucoup. 
 
 very much. 
 
68 THE NURSERY— Continued. 
 
 113. Vocabulary. 
 
 une histoire, a history; a story; reussi, succeeded; 
 
 un dessin, a drawing; tacher, to try, to endeavor; 
 
 une page, a page; a l'avenir, in the future; 
 
 l'encre {for la encre), the ink; d'abord, first; alors, then; 
 
 epais, epaisse, thick; par cceur, by heart. 
 
 114. La Chambve des Enfants. (Voir p. 30.) 
 Nous avons fini nos devoirs pour clemain. 
 
 We have finished our tasks for to-morrow. 
 
 . Voulez-vous nous raconter une histoire ? 
 
 Will you tons relate a story? 
 
 II faut d'abord voir ce que vous avez fait. 
 
 I must first see what you have done. 
 
 Moi, j'ai fait un dessin ; le void. 
 
 — I have made a drawing ; it here is (here it is). 
 
 Un cheval ; c'est bien fait ; j'en suis contente. 
 
 A horse ; that is well done ; I with it am pleased. 
 
 Et vous, Marie, avez-vous ecrit votre page ? 
 
 And you, Mary, have you written your page? 
 
 J'ai fini, mais je n'ai pas bien reussi. 
 
 I have finished, hut I — have not well succeeded. 
 
 L'encre n ? est pas bonne ; elle est trop epaisse. 
 
 The ink — is not good ; it is too thick. 
 
 II faut tacher de mieux faire a Tavenir. 
 
 You must try to better do in the future. 
 
 Anne, avez-vous etuclie votre lecon ? 
 
 Ann, have you studied your lesson? 
 
 Oui, mademoiselle, je la sais par coeur. 
 
 Yes, miss, I it know hy heart. 
 
 Alors je vais vous lire une belle histoire. 
 
 Then I am going to you to read a pretty story. 
 
TO SCHOOL— Continued. 69 
 
 115. Vocabulary. 
 
 revenez-vous ? do you return ? le temps, tlie time; the weather; 
 
 je reviens, I return; come back; midi, noon; demi, half; 
 
 en, from there; une demi heure, half an hour; 
 
 occupe, occupied; prenez-vous? do you take? 
 
 116. A VEcole. (Voir p. 32.) 
 
 A quelle heure allez-vous a l'ecole ? 
 
 At what time do you go to — school ? 
 
 J'y vais a neuf heures du matin. 
 
 I there go at nine o'clock in the morning. 
 
 A quelle heure en revenez-vous ? 
 
 At what time from there do you return ? 
 
 J'en reviens a deux heures de Fapres-midi. 
 
 I from there return at two o'clock in the afternoon. 
 
 Etes-vous occupe tout le temps que vous y etes? 
 
 Are you occupied all the time — you there are? 
 
 Nous avons une demi-heure de recreation a midi. 
 
 We have half an hour recreation at noon. 
 
 Combien d'eleves y a-t-il dans votre classe ? 
 
 How many — scholars are there in your class ? 
 
 Je crois qu'il y en a quinze. 
 
 I believe that there are — fifteen. 
 
 Quels jours prenez-vous votre lecon de musique ? 
 
 (On) what days do you take your music lesson ? 
 
 Je la prends le lundi et le jeudi. 
 
 I it take — Mondays and — Thursdays. 
 
 Qu'est-ce que vous faites le samedi ? 
 
 What do you do — Saturdays ? 
 
 Je sors avec mon pere, ou je vais voir mes amis. 
 
 I go out with my father, or I go to see my friends. 
 
70 IN THE PARLOR— -Continued. 
 
 117. Vocabulary, 
 
 jour de reception, reception day; indispose, indisposed ; 
 charme de, glad to; une emplette, a purchase 
 
 comment se porte. . . ? how is. . . ? rencontre, met; 
 je me porte bien, I am well; la bonte, the kindness; 
 
 la sante, health; aupres de, near; with. 
 
 118. Au Salon. (Voir p. 34.) 
 
 Yoici jeudi, Marie, votre jour de reception. 
 
 This is Thursday, Mary, your reception day. 
 
 Monsieur Lambert, je suis charmee de vous voir. 
 
 Mr. Lambert, I am glad to you see. 
 
 Comment se porte monsieur Lambert ? 
 
 How is Mr. Lambert? 
 
 Ma saute" est bonne, mademoiselle ; et la v6tre ? 
 
 My health is good, Miss ; and (how is) yours ? 
 
 Merci, monsieur, je me porte bien ; etmadameL. ? 
 
 Thank you, sir, I am well ; and Mrs. L. ? 
 
 Elle est indisposee ; elle ne sera pas ici. 
 
 She is indisposed ; she — will not be here. 
 
 Est-ce que Louise est restee aupres de sa mere ? 
 
 Has Louisa remained with her mother? 
 
 Pardonnez-moi ; elle va venir avec son frere. 
 
 I beg your pardon ; she will come with her brother. 
 
 Je vous ai rencontres hier, vous et votre oncle. 
 
 I you have met yesterday, you and your uncle. 
 
 Je vous ai vu, mais vous etiez dejaj)asse. 
 
 I you saw, but you had already passed. 
 
 Nous allions faire quelques emplettes. 
 
 We were going to make a few purchases (to shop). 
 
 Mon oncle a eu la bonte" de m'acheter un even tail. 
 
 My uncle has had the kindness to me buy a fan. 
 
AT BREAKFAST— Continued. 71 
 
 119. Vocabulary. 
 
 on vient de sonner, the bell has descendez, go down; 
 
 just rung; je suivrai, I will follow; 
 
 eh bien done! well then ! du cafe, coffee; du the, tea; 
 
 en retard, late, behind; du poisson, fish ; un peu, a little; 
 
 ma faute, my fault. 
 
 120. A Dtjeuner. (Voir p. 36.) 
 
 A-t-on sonne pour le dejeuner ? 
 
 Have they rung for — breakfast? 
 
 On vient de sonner, etjenesuis pas encore habillee. 
 
 The bell has just rung, and I — am not yet dressed. 
 
 Eh bien done, depechez-vous ; j'ai bien faim. 
 
 Well then, make haste ; I am very hungry. 
 
 Ne m'attendez pas ; descendez ; je vous suivrai. 
 
 — Do not wait for me; go down; I you will follow. 
 
 Bonjour, maman ; nous sommes un peu en retard. 
 
 Good-morning, mamma; we are a little behind. 
 
 C'est ma faute ; je me suis lev£e un peu troptard. 
 
 It is my fault; I have risen a little too late. 
 
 Prenez-vous du cafe, ma niece ? 
 
 Do you take — coffee, my niece ? 
 
 Je vous remercie, ma tante, je prends du the\ 
 
 I you thank, my aunt, I take — tea. 
 
 Voulez-vous de la viande ou du poisson ? 
 
 Will you have — — meat or — fish ? 
 
 Je mangerai un peu de poisson. 
 
 I will eat a little — fish. 
 
 Et vous, Pauline, que voulez-vous ? 
 
 And you, Pauline, what will you have ? 
 
 Je prendrai un oeuf, maman, et une tasse de lait. 
 
 I will take an egg, mamma, and a cup of milk. 
 
72 AT A PICNIC— Continued. 
 
 121. Vocabulary. 
 
 asseyons-nous, let us sit down; une serviette, a napkin; 
 
 mettez, put ; defaites, undo; unpack; , de la limonade, lemonade; 
 versez, pour out ; .passez, hand; frais, fraiche, fresh, cool; 
 
 servons-nous, let us make use; decoupez, carve ; 
 
 une assiette, a plate; un poulet, a chicken. 
 
 122. En Pique-Nique. (Voir p. 38.) 
 
 Oh qu'il fait bon ici sous les arbres ! 
 
 Oh how good it is here under the trees ! 
 
 Asseyons-nous sur ce banc et goutons. 
 
 Let us sit down on that bench and lunch. 
 
 Mettez votre corbeille pres de l'arbre, et d£faites-la 
 
 Put your basket near the tree, and unpack it. 
 
 Voici des gateaux et toutes sortes de bonnes Glioses. 
 
 Here are — cakes and all kinds of good things. 
 
 Passez les serviettes, et 6tez les verres du panier. 
 
 Hand the napkins, and take the glasses out of the basket, 
 
 Mettez-les sur l'herbe,ici devant nous. 
 
 Put them on the grass, here before us. 
 
 Yersez de la limonade, et donnez m'en un verre. 
 
 Pouf out some lemonade, and give me — a glass. i 
 
 Allons chercher de l'eau au ruisseau. 
 
 Let us go for — — water to the brook. 
 
 L'eau du ruisseau est fraiche et bonne. 
 
 The water of the brook is cool and good. 
 
 Decoupez le poulet, et passez les assiettes. 
 
 Carve the chicken, and pass the plates. 
 
 Nous avons oublie les fourchettes ; il n'y en a pas, 
 
 We have forgotten the forks ; there are none. 
 
 Qa ne fait rien ; servons-nous de nos doigts. 
 
 That makes (is) nothing; let us make use of our fingers. 
 
THE DANCE ON THE SWARD— Continued. 73 
 
 123. Vocabulary. 
 
 ce serait, it would be; vis a vis de, opposite; 
 
 une contredanse, a quadrille; appeler, to call off; 
 
 un violon, a violin; une figure, a figure; 
 
 un cavalier, a gentleman; pense (a), thought (of); 
 
 l'ombre, the shade; appris, learned; 
 
 une place, a place; un exemple, an example. 
 
 124:. La Danse sur la Pelouse. (Voir p. 40.) 
 
 Si nous dansions, ce serait charmant. 
 
 If we were to dance, that would be charming. 
 
 J'ai pense a cela ; j'ai apporte mon violon. 
 
 I have thought of that; I have brought ray violin. 
 
 Dansons une contredanse ici a 1 'ombre. 
 
 Let us dance a quadrille here in the shade. 
 
 Cavaliers aupres de vos dames ; en place. 
 
 Gentlemen to your partners ; in place {take your places). 
 
 Vousdeux, mettez-vons vis a vis d 'Henri et Marie. 
 
 You two, place yourselves opposite Henry and Mary. 
 
 Tiens, Frederic, seras-tu le maitre des ceremonies ? 
 
 How so, Frederick, are you to be the master of ceremonies ? 
 
 Pourquoi pas ; il faut que quelqu'un le soit. 
 
 Why not ; it is necessary that some one (so) should be. 
 
 Mais est-ce que tu sais appeler les figures ? 
 
 But do you know how to call off the figures ? 
 
 Sans doute ; j'ai appris cela a l'ecole de danse. 
 
 Undoubtedly; I have learned that at the dancing-school. 
 
 Par exemple : " Enavant deux; " " Chassez huit." 
 
 For instance : " Forward two ; " " Chassez." 
 
 " Balancez vos dames," et ainsi de suite. 
 
 "Balance," and so forth. 
 
 Nous y voila ; ca ira ; commencons. 
 
 Here we are; that will do ; let us begin. 
 
74 
 
 AT WORK— Continued. 
 
 125. Vocabulary. 
 
 il reste, there remains ; 
 j'ai besoin de, I have need of; 
 un echeveau, a skein ; 
 une bobine, a spool; 
 nne aiguille, a needle ; 
 une epingle, a pin. 
 
 un tiroir, a drawer ; 
 un canif, a'penknife; 
 des ciseaux, scissors; 
 la couleur, the color; 
 la nuance, the shade; 
 different, different, various. 
 
 126. A VOuvrage. (Voir p. 42.) 
 
 Comment va l'ouvrage ? avance-t-il ? 
 
 How goes the work ? does it advance ? 
 
 Ca va bien ; je l'aurai fini demain. 
 
 It goes well ; I it shall have finished to-morrow. 
 
 II me reste encore quelques flenrs a faire. 
 
 There to me remains still a few flowers to be made. 
 
 J'aurai besoin de soie de differentes couleurs. 
 
 I shall have need of silk of different colors. 
 
 Voulez-vous rn'en acheter quelques echeveaux ? 
 
 Will you tome— buy a few skeins? 
 
 II y a plusieurs bobines de soie dans votre boite. 
 
 There are several spools of silk in your box. 
 
 Ce ne sont pas les nuances qu'il me faut. 
 
 They — are not the shades which I want. 
 
 Je ne sais ce que j'ai fait de mes ciseaux. 
 
 I don't know what I have done with my scissors. 
 
 Yoila vos ciseaux dans votre boite a ouvrage. 
 
 There are your scissors in your work-box. 
 
 Y a-t-il encore des aiguilles comme celle-ci ? 
 
 Are there 
 
 still 
 
 needles 
 
 like 
 
 this one? 
 
 II y a des aiguilles et des epingles dans ce tiroir. 
 
 There are — needles and — pins in that drawer. 
 
 Voulez-vous me passer ce canif, s'il vous plait ? 
 
 Will you tome hand that penknife, if you please? 
 
UNDER TEE TREES— Continued. 75 
 
 127* Vocabulary, 
 
 il court, lie runs; la difference, the difference; 
 
 ils courent, they run ; entre, between ; 
 
 le plus vite, the fastest ; le bois, the wood ; 
 
 le plus jeune, the youngest ; suivre, to follow. 
 
 128. Sous les Arbres. (Voir p. 44.) 
 
 Vois-tu les deux garcons qui courent la-bas ? 
 
 Do you see the two boys who are running yonder ? 
 
 Je les vois courir ; ce sont mes cousins. 
 
 I them see run ; they are my cousins. 
 
 Jean court le plus vite, et c'est le plus jeune. 
 
 John runs the fastest, and he is the youngest. 
 
 Quelle est la difference d'age entre eux ? 
 
 What is the difference of age between them? 
 
 Charles a dix ans, et Jean en a neuf. 
 
 Charles is ten years, and John — is nine. 
 
 Charles n'est pas fort ; il est souvent malade. 
 
 Charles — is not strong; he is often sick. 
 
 C'est pourquoi il ne va pas a l'ecole a present. 
 
 That is why he — goes not to — school at present. 
 
 II n'est pas aussi avance que son frere. 
 
 He — is not so far advanced as his brother. 
 
 Parce qu'il ne peut pas etudier beaucoup. 
 
 Because he — can not study much. 
 
 Tl a en mal aux yeux pendant longtemps. 
 
 He has had sore eyes for a long time. 
 
 lis vont au bois ; voulons-nous les j suivre ? 
 
 They are going to the wood ; will we them — follow ? 
 
 Je crois qu'il est temps de retourner a la maison. 
 
 I believe that it is time to return home. 
 
76 MINE AND THINE— Continued. 
 
 129, Vocabulary, 
 
 un parapluie, an umbrella ; nettoyer, to clean; 
 
 une galoche, an overshoe; apporter, to bring ; 
 
 une servante, a servant girl ; rendre, to render, to return 
 
 emporter, to carry away ; il nous faut, we want. 
 
 130. Le Mien et le Tien. (Voir p. 46.) 
 
 Sais-tu ou est mon parapluie, Charles ? 
 
 Do you know where is my umbrella, Charles ? 
 
 Oui, le tien et le mien sont a l'eeole. 
 
 Yes, yours and mine are at — school. 
 
 Elise n'aura pas besoin du sien ; prends-le. 
 
 Eliza will not have need of hers; take it. 
 
 Voici une lecon que je trouve bien difficile. 
 
 Here is a lesson which I find ' very difficult. 
 
 La mienne est aussi difficile que la tienne. 
 
 Mine is as difficult as yours. 
 
 Chaque eleve trouve la sienne difficile. 
 
 Every scholar finds his difficult. 
 
 Oil sont mes galoches ; le sais-tu? 
 
 Where are my overshoes ; it do you know ? 
 
 Les tiennes et les miennes sont en bas. 
 
 Yours and mine are down-stairs. 
 
 La servante les a emportees pour les nettoyer. 
 
 The servant them has carried away to them clean. 
 
 Dites-lui de nous les apporter tout de suite. 
 
 Tell her to to us them bring immediately. 
 
 II nous les faut ; nous allons sortir. 
 
 We want them ; we are going out. 
 
 Nous allons rendre visite a nos amis. 
 
 We are going to p;iy a visit to our friends. 
 
THE CHOICE- Continued. 77 
 
 131. Vocabulary. 
 
 de l'or, gold ; un ruban, a ribbon ; 
 
 de l'argent, silver; money; regardez, look ; 
 
 un collier, a necklace ; examinez, examine ; 
 
 une croix d'or, a gold cross ; vous avezraison (de), you are right; 
 
 une montre, a watch ; choisir, to choose ; 
 
 une chaine, a chain; un avis, an opinion ; bleu, blue. 
 
 132. Le Choix. (Voir p. 48.) 
 
 Voyez les belles choses, les colliers et les croix. 
 
 Behold the pretty things, the necklaces and the crosses. 
 
 Regardez, examinez, et faites votre choix. 
 
 Look, examine, and make (take) your choice. 
 
 Yoici une croix (Tor, et voila une chaine. 
 
 Here is a golden cross, and there a chain. 
 
 Je prencls les deux ; ces choses vont ensemble. 
 
 I take both; those things go together. 
 
 Vous avez raison de choisir corame vous le faites. 
 
 You are right to choose as you — do. 
 
 Etde ces deux chapeaux, lequel vous plait le mieux? 
 
 And of these two bonnets, which to you pleases best? 
 
 Celui aux rubans bleus me plait mieux que Pautre. 
 
 The one with the blue ribbons me pleases better than the other. 
 
 Lesquels de ces rubans trouvez-vous les plusjolis? 
 
 Which of these ribbons do you find the prettiest ? 
 
 Je trouve ceux-ci plus jolis que ceux-la. 
 
 I find these prettier than those. 
 
 Dites-moi quelle montre est la meilleure ? 
 
 Tell me which watch is the best? 
 
 Celle d'or est meilleure que celle d'argent. 
 
 The one of gold i* better than the one of silver. 
 
 Nous sommes du meme avis ; j'en suis content. 
 
 We are of the same opinion ; I of it am glad. 
 
78 THE SAL UTA TION— Continued. 
 
 133. Vocabulary, 
 
 un parent, une parente, a relative; connu, known; endormi, asleep ; 
 nous appelions, we called, used elle avait l'air, she looked as if ; 
 
 to call ; revenu, returned, come back ; 
 
 ferme, shuts, closes ; en ville, a la ville, in town, to 
 
 l'ceil, the eye ; town ; 
 
 en lisant, when reading ; a la campagne, in the country. 
 
 134. Le Salut. (Voir p. 50.) 
 
 Quelle est la dame que vous venez de saluer? 
 
 Who is the lady whom you have just bowed to ? 
 
 C'est une de nos parentes ; elle demeure pres d'ici. 
 
 She is one of our relatives (a relative of ours) ; she lives near here. 
 
 C'est elle clont la petite est morte, 1 'autre jour. 
 
 It is she whose little girl died, the other day. 
 
 Vous l'avez conuue ; elle allait a notre eeole. 
 
 You her have known ; she used to go to our school. 
 
 Nous Fappelions toujours "La Petite Ferme l'CEil." 
 
 We her used to call always "Little Close the Eye." 
 
 Parce qu' elle avait l'air endormi quand elle lisait. 
 
 Because she looked as if (she was) asleep when she was reading. 
 
 C'etait une bonne fille que tout le monde aimait. 
 
 She was a good girl whom everybody liked. 
 
 Quand votre tante est-elle revenue de la campagne? 
 
 When has your aunt — returned from the country ? 
 
 Elle est arrivee en ville hier au soir. 
 
 She has arrived in town yesterday evening (last night). 
 
 Mon cousin Charles est revenu a la ville avec elle. 
 
 My cousin Charles has returned to town with her. 
 
 Mes cousines sont restees a la campagne. 
 
 My cousins have remained in the country. 
 
 N'oubliez pas de dire a Charles de venir me voir. 
 
 Do not forget to tell — Charles to come me to see (to call on me). 
 
 
THE VISIT— Continued. 79 
 
 135. Vocabulary. 
 
 entendu, heard ; prier, to ask ; un medecin, a phygician, a doctor ; 
 egal, equal, same ; il faudra, it will be necessary ; 
 
 c'est egal, it is the same; no matter; au logis, at home; sa carte, his card; 
 donne, given; repasser, to call again ; 
 
 les cheveux, the hair; la bonte, the kindness ; 
 
 136. La Visite. (Voir p. 52.) 
 
 Avez-vous entendu sonner? 
 
 Have you heard (the hell) ring ? 
 
 Marie est allee ouvrir la porte. 
 
 Mary has gone to open the door. 
 
 C'est un monsieur qui demande M. votre pere. 
 
 It is a gentleman who asks for — your father. 
 
 Faites-le entrer au salon, et priez-le de s'asseoir. 
 
 Make him enter (show him in) the parlor, and ask him to be seated. 
 
 Je crois que monsieur votre pere est sorti. 
 
 I believe that — your father is out. 
 
 C'est egal. Yous a-t-il donne sa carte ? 
 
 No matter. To you has he given his card ? 
 
 La voici. II s'appelle monsieur La Borde. 
 
 Here it is. His name is Mr. La Borde. 
 
 C'est un liomme a cheveux blancs qui a Fair d'un 
 
 He is a man . with white hair who has the look of a 
 
 medecin. 
 
 physician (looks like). 
 
 C'est le vieux monsieur que mon pere attendait. 
 
 It is the old gentleman whom my father was expecting. 
 
 II faudra lui dire que papa n'est pas au logis. 
 
 It will be necessary him to tell that papa — is not in. 
 
 Priez-le cl'avoir la bonte de repasser demain. 
 
 Ask him to have the kindness to call again to-morrow. 
 
 Dites-lui que papa est toujours a lamaisona midi. 
 
 Tell him that papa is always at home at noon. 
 
80 SUNRISE— Continued. 
 
 137> Vocabulary, 
 
 se lever, to rise ; conduire, to conduct ; to take ; 
 
 ensuite, then, afterwards ; entrer (dans), to enter ; 
 
 servi, served up ; un pensionnat, a boarding-school 
 
 je suis presse, I am in a hurry ; elle reviendra, she will return. 
 
 138, Le Lever du Soleil. (Voir p. 54.) 
 
 Ce matin je me suis leve avant le lever du soleil. 
 
 This morning I have risen hefore sunrise. 
 
 De ma fenetre j'ai vu le soleil se lever. 
 
 From my window I have seen the sun rise. 
 
 Je me suis lave et je me suis habille. 
 
 I myself washed and — — — dressed. 
 
 Ensuite je suis descendu pour dejeuner. 
 
 Then I have come down to breakfast. 
 
 Ma mere et ma soeur etaient dans la salle a manger. 
 
 My mother and — sister were in the dining-room. 
 
 Le dejeuner etait servi ; nous etions presses. 
 
 — Breakfast was served up ; we were in a hurry. 
 
 Ma mere et ma soeur allaient partir. 
 
 My mother and — sister were going to leave. 
 
 Apres le dejeuner elles sont parties en voiture. 
 
 After — breakfast they have started in a carriage. 
 
 Ma mere est allee conduire ma sceur a L 
 
 My mother has gone to take my sister to L. . . . 
 
 Ma soeur doit y entrer dans un pensionnat. 
 
 My sister is to there enter into a boarding-school. 
 
 Elle va v rester pendant deux ou trois ans. 
 
 She is going there to stay for two or three years. 
 
 Qnand elle reviendra, elle parlera francais. 
 
 When she returns, she will speak French. 
 
ON THE ICE— Continued. 81 
 
 139. Vocabulary, 
 
 la saison, the season ; agreable, agreeable, pleasant ; 
 
 le printemps, spring ; fort, very; moins, less; 
 
 l'ete, summer ; . pousser, to shoot up; de nouveau, anew; 
 
 l'automne, autumn ; reverdir, to grow green again ; 
 
 l'hiver, winter ; renaitre, to spring up again; 
 
 la terre, the earth ; chanter, to sing; se rejouir, to rejoice. 
 
 140. Sur la Glace. (Voir p. 56.) 
 
 Henri, quelle est la saison que tuaimes le mieux? 
 
 Henry, which is the season that you like best? 
 
 C'est l'hiver ; parce qu'alors nous allons patiner. 
 
 It is — winter; because then we go skating. 
 
 Et quand la neige couvre la terre on va en traineau. 
 
 And when — snow covers the earth one goes in a sleigh. 
 
 Moi, je n'aime pas l'hiver ; j'aime mieux l'ete. 
 
 — I do not like — winter; I like better —summer. 
 
 En ete* on est a la campagne, et c'est fort agreable. 
 
 In summer, we are in the country, and that is very pleasant. 
 
 On ne va pas a l'ecole, et l'on s'arnuse tout le temps. 
 
 We do not go to — school, and — amuse ourselves all the time. 
 
 II fait trop chaud en 6te ; j'aime mieux l'automne. 
 
 It is too warm in summer ; I like better — autumn. 
 
 En automne il faitmoins chaud, etl'on se porte mieux. 
 
 In autumn it is less warm, and one feels better. 
 
 Pour moi, le printemps est la saison la plus belle. 
 
 For me, — spring is the season the most beautiful. 
 
 Alorsl'herbe poussede nouveau, la terre reverdit. 
 
 Then the grass shoots up anew, the earth grows green again. 
 
 Les fleurs renaissent, et les oiseaux chantent. 
 
 The flowers spring up again, and the birds sing. 
 
 Tout raj e unit et tout se rejouit. 
 
 Everything revives and everything rejoices, 
 
82 MAMMA'S BIRTHDA Y— Continued. 
 
 141. Vocabulary. 
 
 l'anniversaire, the anniversary ; feu d'artifice, fire-works ; 
 
 le mariage, the marriage ; tirer,-to draw; to set off (fire-works); 
 
 Noel, Christmas ; un petard, a cracker ; 
 
 le jour de l'an, New- Year's day; armes a feu, fire-arms ; 
 
 les etre es \ New- Year's gifts ; presque, almost ; puis, and then ; 
 
 ' ( Christmas-box ; notre Sauveur, our Saviour. 
 
 142. La FSte de Maman. (Voir p. 58.) 
 
 Quel est le jourde l'annee que tu aimesle mieux? 
 
 Which is the day of the year that you like best ? 
 
 C'est le dix juin, l'anniversaire de la fete de 'maman. 
 
 It is the tenth of June, the anniversary of mamma's birthday. 
 
 Ensuite j'aime presque autant le quinze mai. 
 
 Then I like almost as much the fifteenth of May. 
 
 C'est l'anniversaire de la fete de papa. 
 
 That is the anniversary of papa's birthday. 
 
 II y a aussi le seize avril que nous celebrons. 
 
 There is also the sixteenth of April which we celebrate. 
 
 C'est l'anniversaire du mariage de mes parents. 
 
 It is the anniversary of the marriage of my parents. 
 
 J'aime la f§te de Noel ; c'est la fete de notre Sauveur. 
 
 I like Christmas ; it is our Saviour's birthday. 
 
 Ce jour-la mes oncles et mes tantes dinen t avec nous. 
 
 (On) that day my uncles and my aunts dine with us. 
 
 Puis j'aime le jour de l'an; c'est le jourdes etrennes. 
 
 And then I like New Year's Day ; it is the day for presents. 
 
 N'airaes-tu pas le quatre juillet, la fete nationale? 
 
 Do you not like the fourth of July, the national festival ? 
 
 J'aime le jour, et le feu d'artifice qu'on tire le soir. 
 
 I like the day, and the fire-works which they set off in the evening. 
 
 Mais je n'aime pas le bruit des petards et des 
 
 But I — do not like the noise of the crackers and — 
 
 armes a feu. 
 
 fire-arms. 
 
A VISIT TO THE MARKET. 83 
 
 143. Une Visite au Marc7iS. 
 
 Samedi passe j'ai ete au marche avec mon pere. 
 
 On Saturday last I went to the market with my father. 
 
 J 7 y ai vu toutes sortes de legumes et de fruits en 
 
 I there saw all kinds of vegetables and — fruits in 
 
 grandes quantites. II y avait des choux, des 
 
 large quantities. There were — cabbages, — 
 
 choux-fleurs, des pommes de terre, des 6pis de 
 
 cauliflowers, — potatoes, — ears of 
 
 mais, des navets, des carottes, des oignons, des 
 
 corn, — turnips, — carrots, — onions, — 
 
 haricots et des pois. 
 
 beans, and — peas. 
 
 On y voyait des tas de melons, des barils 
 
 One there saw — heaps of melons, — barrels 
 
 de pommes et cle poires, des sacs de noix, des 
 
 of apples and — pears, — bags of nuts, — 
 
 paniers de peches et de prunes, des caisses d'o- 
 
 baskets of peaches and — plums, — boxes of or- 
 
 ranges, de citrons, de figues, cle dattes et de 
 
 — lemons, — figs, — dates and 
 
 raisin. 
 
 grapes. 
 
 D'un autre c6te e'etait de la viande de boucherie : 
 
 On another side there was — — butcher's meat : 
 
 du boeuf, du veau, du mouton, et de Tagneau. 
 
 — beef, — veal, — mutton, and — — lamb. 
 
 Plus loin il y avait de la volaille : des dindes, des 
 
 Farther on there was -= — poultry : ^ turkeys, — 
 
84 A VISIT TO THE MARKET. 
 
 poules, des poulets, des oies, des canards et des 
 
 hens, — chickens, — geese, — clucks and — 
 
 pigeons. 
 
 pigeons. 
 
 Tout autour du marche etaient ranges des 
 
 All around the market were drawn up — 
 
 chariots et des charrettes, qui avaient apporte 
 
 wagons and — carts, which had brought 
 
 toutes ces choses. 
 
 all these things. 
 
 Partout il y avait une foule immense de gens 
 
 Everywhere there was a crowd immense of people 
 
 qui y etaient venus, les uns pour vendre, les 
 
 who there had come, some to sell, 
 
 autres pour acheter. Tout ce monde pari ait 
 
 others to buy. All these people spoke 
 
 constamment. C'etait un bruit de voix vraiment 
 
 constantly! It was a noise of voices truly 
 
 etourdissant. 
 
 deafening. 
 
 Mon pere voulait me menerau marche au poisson, 
 
 My father wished me to take to the fish market, 
 
 mais je Fai prie de ine reconduire a la maison. 
 
 but I him begged to me reconduct home. 
 
 J'etais tres-fatigue, et si etourdi que je n'aurais 
 
 I was very tired, and so stunned that I — would 
 
 pas su retrouver mon chemin, si mon pere 
 
 not have known how to find back my way, . if my father 
 
 n'avait pas ete avec moi. 
 
 •-. had not been with me. 
 
OUR HOUSE. 85 
 
 14:4=. Notre Maison. 
 
 Notre maison est spacieuse et commode. Mori 
 
 Our house is spacious and convenient. My 
 
 pere Fa fait batir pour nous, il y a quelques annees. 
 
 father had it built for us, a few years ago. 
 
 Elle a quatre etages et un sous-sol. Au dessous 
 
 It has four stories and a basement. Below 
 
 du sous-sol est la cave, ou Ton met le charbon et 
 
 the basement is the cellar, where — they put the coal and 
 
 le bois a bruler. La il y a aussi le calorifere, 
 
 the fire-wood. There is also the calorifer (furnace), 
 
 qui chauffe toutes les parties de la maison, en 
 
 which warms all the parts of the house, in 
 
 envoyant Fair chaud dans tous les appartements, 
 
 sending hot air into all the rooms, 
 
 au moyen de tuyaux enferm^s dans la maconnerie 
 
 by means of pipes inclosed in the masonwork 
 
 des murs. Ces tuyaux, qui sont de tole ou de 
 
 of the walls. These pipes, which are of sheet iron or — 
 
 ferblanc, conduisent a des ouvertures pratiquees 
 
 tin plate, lead to — openings made 
 
 dans les murs des appartements, et qu'on nomme 
 
 m the walls of the rooms, and which we call 
 
 bouches de chaleur. On peut les ouvrir et les 
 
 registers. One can them open and — 
 
 fermer a volonte. 
 
 shut as one wishes. 
 
 Le sous-sol. qui est plus bas de trois piecls que le 
 
 The basement, which is lower by three feet than the 
 
 rez de chaussee, contient la cuisine et les offices, 
 
 level of the street, contains the kitchen and the pantries, 
 
86 
 
 OUR HOUSE. 
 
 et aussi une grande piece a l'usage des domes- 
 
 and also a large room for the use of the serv- 
 
 tiques. 
 
 Au premier il y a le salon, la bibliotheque et 
 
 On the first floor are the parlor, — library and 
 
 la salle a manger. Au second, sur le devant, ily a 
 
 dining-room. On the second floor, in the front, is 
 
 Fappartement de mes parents, et sur le derriere, 
 
 the apartment of my parents, and in the rear (are), 
 
 ma chambre et la chambre des enfants. La 
 
 my room and the nursery. The 
 
 salle de bains est au centre, entre la chambre de 
 
 bath-room is in the centre, between the front 
 
 devant et la chambre de derriere. 
 
 room and the back room. 
 
 Au troisieme il y a quatre chambres a coucher, 
 
 On the third floor there are four sleeping-rooms, 
 
 et au quatrieme il y en a deux, et une grande 
 
 and on the fourth there are two, and a large 
 
 piece ouverte, qu'on appelle grenier, et ou Ton 
 
 open place, which they call garret, and where — they 
 
 met toutes sortes de choses. 
 
 put all kinds of things. 
 
 La maison a deux portes d'entree. L'une est 
 
 The house has two street doors. The one is 
 
 la porte du sous-sol. Elle est dans l'aire au dessous 
 
 the basement door. It is in the area below 
 
 du perron. II faut descendre quatre marches 
 
 the stoop. One has to go down four steps 
 
 pour y arriver. L'autfe porte conduit au premier. 
 
 to get there. The other door leads to the first floor. 
 
OUR HOUSE. 87 
 
 On y arrive de la rue en montant le perron de pierre, 
 
 One reaches there from the street in ascending the stone stoop, 
 
 qui a huit marches. Cette porte donne dans 
 
 which has eight steps. This door opens into 
 
 le vestibule. Une seconde porte admet dans Fin- 
 
 the vestibule. A second door gives access to the in- 
 
 terieurdelamaison. En entrant dans le corridor 
 
 terior of the house. Upon entering — the hall 
 
 on a devant soi, sur la gauche, le grand escalier qui 
 
 one has before him, on the left (hand), the large staircase which 
 
 conduit au second, et a droite, la porte du salon. 
 
 leads to the second story, and to the right, the door of the parlor. 
 
 En allant tout droit le long de la rampe qui borde 
 
 In going straight on along the hand-rail which borders 
 
 l'escalier du sous-sol, on arrive a la porte de 
 
 the staircase of the basement, one arrives at the door of 
 
 la salle a manger, ayant a droite une seconde 
 
 the dining-room, having to the right a second 
 
 porte du salon, et a gauche l'escalier de service, 
 
 parlor door, and to the left the servants' staircase, 
 
 qui monte au second et debouche sur le palier, 
 
 which leads up to the second floor and terminates in the landing, 
 
 en face de la salle de bains. 
 
 in front of the batb-room. 
 
 L'eau est introduite dans toutes les chambres 
 
 The water is introduced in all the sleeping 
 
 a coucher au second et au troisieme. II y a 
 
 rooms on the second and — third stories. There are 
 
 des cuvettes fixes en marbre, chacune avec deux 
 
 wash-basins stationary of marble, each with two 
 
88 THE PARLOR. 
 
 robinets, Fun pour l'eau froide, l'autre pour l'eau 
 
 faucets, one for cold water, the other for hot 
 
 chaude. 
 
 water. 
 
 La maison est eclairee au gaz. Depuis la cave 
 
 The house is lighted by gas. From the cellar 
 
 jusqu'au grenier, il y a, partout ou il est neees- 
 
 to the garret, there are, everywhere it is neces- 
 
 saire, des tuj^aux a gaz, auxquels sont ajoutes des 
 
 sary, gas pipes, to which are affixed 
 
 candelabres, des tubes, ou des bras de metal, a 
 
 chandeliers, tubes, or brackets of metal, with 
 
 bees de gaz. 
 
 gas-burners. 
 
 Derriere la maison il y a une cour, et au bout de 
 
 Behind the house is a yard, and at the end of 
 
 la cour il y a lecurie et la remise, dont la sortie 
 
 the yard are the stable and the coach-house, the egress of which 
 
 est dans une ruelle aboutissant a une grande rue, 
 
 is in a lane running to a large street, 
 
 qui traverse la rue ou nous demeurons a une 
 
 which crosses the street in which we live at a 
 
 petite distance cle notre porte. 
 
 short distance from our door. 
 
 145. Le Salon, 
 
 Notre salon est beaucoup plus long que large. 
 
 Our parlor is much longer than (it is) broad. 
 
 II a cleux fenetres qui donnent sur la rue, deux 
 
 It has two windows which look into the street. two 
 
 portes qui communiquent avec le corridor 
 
 doors that communicate with the ball, 
 
THE PARLOR. 89 
 
 et au fond une grande porte a coulisse, par la- 
 
 and at the lower end a large sliding-door, through 
 
 quelle on entre dans la bibliotheque. 
 
 which one enters — the library. 
 
 Le plafond est tres-eleve, et peint a fresque. 
 
 The ceiling is very high, and painted in fresco. 
 
 Les niurs sont tapisses cl'une tenture, dont la cou- 
 
 The walls are hung with paper, the delicate color 
 
 leur tend re rehausse la dorure des coruiclies. Le 
 
 of which sets off the gilding of the cornices. The 
 
 plancher est convert d'un tapis que moil pere 
 
 floor is covered with a carpet which my father 
 
 a fait venir d'Angleterre. 
 
 sent for to England. 
 
 Le mobilier, qui a ete renouvele l'annee passee, 
 
 The furniture, which was renewed last year, 
 
 a tout Feclat de la fraicheur. Des canapes, des 
 
 has all the gloss of freshness. — Sofas, — 
 
 fauteuils, des chaises, des tabourets, des tables, 
 
 arm-chairs, — chairs, — stools, — tables, 
 
 des consoles, des etageres, des gueridons, un grand 
 
 — consoles, — etageres, — gueridons, a large 
 
 piano, et quelques statues, qui repr£sentent des 
 
 piano, and a few statues, which represent — 
 
 dieux et des dee^ses de l'antiquite, tous disposes 
 
 gods and — goddesses of — antiquity, all arranged 
 
 avec art et bon gout, charment Foeil par leur 
 
 with art and good taste, please the eye by their 
 
 vari6te. 
 
 variety. 
 
 Sur les manteaux de cheminee, sur les consoles, 
 
 On the mantlepieces, on the consoles, 
 
90 TEE PARLOR. 
 
 les Stageres, et les gueridons, on voit des statuettes, 
 
 the etageres, and — gueridons, one sees — statuettes, 
 
 des vases, et des objets de fantaisie. Les fenetres 
 
 — vases, and — fancy articles. The wiudows 
 
 sont drapees de rideaux de soie et de dentelle, et 
 
 are hung with curtains of silk and — lace, and 
 
 l'espace qui les separe est couvert d'une glace 
 
 the space which separates them is covered with a mirror, 
 
 qui descend du plafond au tapis. Les murs sont 
 
 which descends from the ceiling to the carpet. The walls are 
 
 ornes de peintures a Y huile, parmi lesquels il y a 
 
 adorned with oil paintings, among which are 
 
 le portrait de nion pere et celui de ma mere, qui 
 
 the portrait of my father and that of my mother, which 
 
 sont d'une ressemblance parfaite. 
 
 are perfect likenesses. 
 
 Deux grands candelabres, pendant du plafond, 
 
 Two lar^e chandeliers, hanging from the ceiling, 
 
 etendent leurs branches de tous cotes, et aident 
 
 stretch forth their branches on all sides, and contribute 
 
 a former un ensemble qui d'abord parait confus, 
 
 to form an ensemble which at first seems confused, 
 
 mais qui est pittoresque et fort agreable, surtout 
 
 but which is picturesque and very pleasing, particularly 
 
 le soir, quand, le gaz etant allume, les nombrenx 
 
 in the evening, when, the gas being lighted, the numerous 
 
 jets des candelabres emettent un not de lumiere, 
 
 jets of the chandeliers send forth a flood of light, 
 
 qui eblouit les yeux. 
 
 which dazzles the eyes. 
 
THE LIBRARY. 91 
 
 146. La Bibliotheque. 
 
 Entrons maintenant dans la bibliotheque par la 
 
 Let us enter now into the library by the 
 
 porte qui est ail fond du salon. La grande fengtre 
 
 door which is at the lower end of the parlor. The large bow- 
 
 cintree qui est vis a vis de la porte, a l'autre ex- 
 
 wiudow which is opposite the door, at the other ex- 
 
 tremite de la piece, donne sur la cour. Cette 
 
 tremity of the room, looks into the yard. This 
 
 porte ici a gauche, communique avec la salle a 
 
 door here to the left, communicates with the dining- 
 
 La grande armoire a droite, qui remplit Tespace 
 
 The large cupboard on the right, which fills the space 
 
 entre le mur et la cheminee, contient un grand 
 
 between the wall and the mantlepiece, contains a large 
 
 nombre d'objets curieux, que mon pere a recueillis 
 
 number of objects rare, which my father has collected 
 
 pendant ses differents voyages en Europe. 
 
 during his several visits to Europe. 
 
 Sur le manteau de cheminee il y a une pendnle 
 
 On the mantlepiece are a time-piece 
 
 et deux bustes. De l'autre cote" de la cheminee, 
 
 and two basts. On the other side of the mantlepiece, 
 
 adosse au mur, est un secretaire, ou mon pere a 
 
 set against the wall, is a secretary, at which my father has 
 
 l'habitude de travailler le matin. 
 
 the habit of working in the morning. 
 
 Contre le mur a droite de la fenetre cintree est 
 
 Against the wall to the right of the bow-window is 
 
 une ottomane, ou ma mere vient souvent se re- 
 
 an ottoman, where my mother comes often to rest 
 
92 THE LIBRARY. 
 
 poser et s'entretenir avec mon pere, quand il est 
 
 herself and to converse with my father, when he is 
 
 assis a son secretaire. 
 
 seated at his secretary. 
 
 A gauche de la fenetre cintree il y a un pupitre, 
 
 To the left of the bow-window there is a desk, 
 
 sur lequel est uu ecritoire. Dans les tiroirs du 
 
 on which stands an ink-stand. In the drawers of the 
 
 pupitre il y a du papier a lettres, des enveloppes, 
 
 desk are — letter-paper, * — envelopes, 
 
 et des timbres de poste. C'est ici que ma mere 
 
 and — postage-stamp?. It is here that my mother 
 
 vient faire sa correspondance. 
 
 comes to write her letters. 
 
 Le mur du cCte* de la salle a manger, depuis la 
 
 The wall on the side of the dining-room, from the 
 
 porte jusqu'au coin, est occupe par un grand corps 
 
 door to the corner, is occupied by a large book- 
 
 de bibliotheque, dont les rayons sont remplis de 
 
 case of which the shelves are filled with 
 
 livres. 
 
 books. 
 
 Contre le mur an dessus du manteau de chemi- 
 
 Against the wall above the mantlepiece, 
 
 nee est le portrait de ma grand ? mere paternelle, 
 
 is the portrait of my grandmother paternal, 
 
 et contre le mur au dessus da secretaire de mon 
 
 and ^gainst the wall above the secretary of my 
 
 pere, est le portrait de mon grand-pere paternel. 
 
 father, is the portrait of my grandfather paternal. 
 
 Les portraits de mes nieuls du cute de ma mere 
 
 The portraits of my grand-parents on the side of rfty mother 
 
THE DINING-ROOM. 93 
 
 sont des deux c6tes de la fenStre cintree, l'un 
 
 are on the two sides of the bow-window, the one 
 
 a droite au dessus de Fottomane, Fautre a gauche 
 
 on the right above the ottoman, the other on the left 
 
 au dessus du pupitre. 
 
 above the desk. 
 
 Au milieu de la piece est une table couverte de 
 
 In the middle of the room is a table covered with 
 
 drap vert. Des fauteuils ranges autour de la table 
 
 green cloth. Some arm-chairs ranged around the table 
 
 et places ca et lacontrelesmurs, et unmarchepied, 
 
 and placed here and there against the walls, and a foot-step, 
 
 qui sert a atteindre aux rayons superieurs de la 
 
 which serves to reach to the shelves upper of the 
 
 bibliotheque, complement le mobilier de ce que mon 
 
 book-case, complete the furniture of what my 
 
 pere appelle son cabinet de travail. 
 
 father calls his study. 
 
 14:7* La Salle a Manger. 
 
 La salle a manger est a cote cle la bibliotheque. 
 
 The dining-room is next to the library. 
 
 Elle a deux portes et une fen^tre cintree, exacte- 
 
 It has two doors and a bow-window, pre- 
 
 ment pareille a celle cle la piece voisine. La porte 
 
 cisely similar to the one of the next room. The door 
 
 priu cipale communique avec le corridor ; puis 
 
 principal communicates with the hall; then 
 
 il y a une porte laterale qui clonne dans la biblio- 
 
 there is a side-door which opens into the li- 
 
 theque. 
 
 brary. 
 
94 
 
 THE DINING-ROOM. 
 
 Yoici les objets qui se presentent d'abord a la 
 
 Here are the objects which, present themselves at first to the 
 
 vue, en entrant par la porte principale : au centre 
 
 eye, upon entering by the door principal : in the centre 
 
 une longue table a manger, des fauteuils places 
 
 a long dining-table, — arm-chairs placed 
 
 a droite et a gauche ; deux buffets adosses au 
 
 to the right and to the left ; two side-tables set against the 
 
 mur du cote gauche ; plus loin, dans le coin pres 
 
 wall on the side left; farther on, in the corner near 
 
 de la fenetre, un sofa ; et da.ns l'autre coin, vis a 
 
 the window, a sofa ; and in the other corner, oppo- 
 
 vis du sofa, une table. Entre la table et le sofa, 
 
 site the sofa, 
 
 table. 
 
 Between the table and the sofa, 
 
 et en face de la fenetre, est une jardiniere, sur 
 
 and in front of the window, is a flower-stand, on 
 
 laqnelle il y a un grand nombre de pots de fleurs. 
 
 which there are a great number of pots with flowers. 
 
 On remarque particulierement les favorites de ma 
 
 One notices particularly the favorites of my 
 
 mere, les hyacinthes, les oeillets, les geraniums, les 
 
 mother, — hyacinths, — carnations, — geraniums, — 
 
 roses. Les murs sont decores de gravures dans 
 
 roses. The walls are adorned with engravings in 
 
 des cadres dores. Sur le manteau de chemin£e, 
 
 — frames gilded. On the mantlepiece 
 
 il y a des vases remplis de fleurs, une pendule, et 
 
 with flowers, a time-piece, and 
 
 there are 
 
 filled 
 
 cles statuettes en bronze. 
 
 — statuettes of bronze. 
 
 D'un cote de la porte principale est la porte de 
 
 On one side of the door principal is the servants' 
 
THE KITCHEN. 95 
 
 service, et de Fautre, il y a un cabinet, ou Ton 
 
 door, and on the other, there is a closet, in which they 
 
 met tout ce qui est neeessaire au service de la 
 
 put everything that is necessary to the service of the 
 
 table : la vaisselle, des plats de toute grandeur, 
 
 table : the plate, — dishes of every size, 
 
 des assiettes, des soupieres, des saladiers, des 
 
 — plates, — soup-tureens, — salad-dishes, — 
 
 huiliers, des salieres, des cafetieres, des theieres, 
 
 cruets, • — salt- stands, — coffee-pots, — teapots, 
 
 des tasses et soucoupes, des sucriers, des beur- 
 
 — cups and saucers, — sugar-bowls, — butter- 
 
 riers, des cruches, des pots au lait, des cuilleres, 
 
 dishes, — pitchers, — milk-pots, — spoons, 
 
 des couteaux et des fourchettes ; enfin, le linge 
 
 — knives and — forks ; finally, the table- 
 
 de table; les nappes, les serviettes, et autres choses 
 
 linen; — table-covers, — napkins, and other things 
 
 queje ne saurais nommer. 
 
 which I " cannot 
 
 148. La Cuisine. 
 
 II faut aussi faire une visite au sous-sol. Je ne 
 
 We must also pay a visit to the basement. I 
 
 vais pas souventdans ce lieu souterrain, mais pour 
 
 do not go often in that place underground, but to 
 
 vous faire plaisir nous allons y descendre, et faire 
 
 you amuse we shall there go down, and pass 
 
 la revue de toute la batterie de cuisine. 
 
 in review all the kitchen apparatus. 
 
 Yous y verrez notregrossecuisiniere, qui regne 
 
 You there will see our stout cook, who reigns 
 
96 THE KITCHEN. 
 
 avec une autorite supreme sur les pots et les poeles, 
 
 with an authority supreme over the pots and — pans. 
 
 Sa voix de stentor se fait entendre dans son do- 
 
 Her voice stentorian is heard in her do- 
 
 maine, des que les choses ne vont pas a son ore. 
 
 main, as soon as — things do not go to her liking. 
 
 Si son aide, la laveuse d'ecuelles, laisse tomber de 
 
 If her assistant, the washer of dishes, lets fall — 
 
 la graisse ou des cendres sur la toile ciree qui 
 
 — grease or -. ashes on the oil-cloth which 
 
 couvre le plancher, ou qu'elle laisse trainer, hors 
 
 covers the floor, or lets lie about, out 
 
 de leurs places, le balai, le seau, le plumeau, la 
 
 of their places, the broom, the pail, the feather-duster, the 
 
 pelle, le fourgon ou les pincettes, la grosse Marie, 
 
 shovel, the poker or tongs, — stout Mary, 
 
 c'est ainsi que nous la nommons, la gronde, et 
 
 it is thus — we her call, her scolds, and 
 
 souvent lui donne du torchon sur les oreilles. 
 
 often to her gives it with the dish-cloth over the ears. 
 
 Elle veut que tout soit en bon ordre, et que cbaque 
 
 She wants that all be in good order, and that every- 
 
 chose soit a sa place. Aussi faut-il vous dire que 
 
 thing be in its place. Also I must you tell that 
 
 la besogne est bien faite. Vous remarquerez 
 
 the business is well done. You will notice 
 
 aisementla proprete du fourneau avec ses fours, et 
 
 easily the neatness of the range with its ovens, and 
 
 Feclat de tous les ustensils, tels que marmites, 
 
 the brilliancy of all the utensils, such as saucepans, 
 
 casseroles, poellons, broches, r6tissoires, bouilloires, 
 
 ste\vpan8, pipkins, spits, roasting-screens, kettles, 
 
THE KITCHEN. 97 
 
 rechauds, Scumoires, et chaudrons, tous 6tag6s en 
 
 chafing-dishes, skimmers, and boilers, all disposed. in 
 
 rungs luisants et polis. 
 
 rows shining und polished. 
 
 La piece adjacente est le lavoir. La blanchisseuse 
 
 The room neighboring is the wash-room. The washerwoman 
 
 y est maintenant a faire la lessive. Les cuviers 
 
 there is now doing the washing. The wash-tubs 
 
 fixes ont des robinets pour l'eau froide et pour 
 
 stationary have — taps for cold and — 
 
 l'eau chaude. L'eau chaude est tiree du grand 
 
 hot water. The hot water is drawn from the large 
 
 chaudron de cuivre que vous voyez dans le coin 
 
 boiler of copper which you see in the corner 
 
 au dessus de I'evier. L'eau sale s'ecoule dans les 
 
 above the sink. The water dirty runs off in the 
 
 6gouts souterrains. 
 
 sewers underground. 
 
 Le repassage du linge se fait dans la chambre 
 
 The ironing of the linen is done in the room 
 
 a c6te. Vous voyez a travers le vitrage les fers a 
 
 next. You see through the glass-windows the smoothing- 
 
 repasser, qui sont a chauffer. La lingere exa- 
 
 irons, which are heating. The seamstress exam- 
 
 mine le linge blanchi, rentre* du blanchissage, et met 
 
 ines the linen cleaned come in from the washing, and puts 
 
 de c6te les articles qui ont besoin d'etre raccom- 
 
 aside the articles which have need of being mend- 
 
 modes. Mais en voila assez. Remontons. 
 
 ed. But that is enough. Let us go up. 
 
 5 
 
98 MY ROOM. 
 
 149, Ma Chambre. 
 
 Venez, Lucie, suivez-moi ; uous allons monter 
 
 Come, Lucy, follow me ; we will go up 
 
 a ma chambre. Nous y pourrons causer a notre 
 
 to my room. We there shall be able to chat at our 
 
 aise, sans qu'on vienne nous interrompre. Ici vous 
 
 ease, without any one coming us to interrupt. Here you 
 
 §tes chez moi, ma chere amie ; c ? est icimaretraite, 
 
 are at my home, my dear friend ; this is — my bower, 
 
 oil je viens mediter et rever pendant mes heures 
 
 where I come to meditate and to muse during my hours 
 
 de loisir. 
 
 of leisure. 
 
 Voila mon prie-Dieu, ou je dis ma priere, le 
 
 There is my kneeling-stool, at which I say my prayers, in the 
 
 matin quancl je me leve et le soir avant de me 
 
 morning when I rise and in the evening before I go to 
 
 coucher. Le lit 011 je couche a ete achete pour 
 
 bed. The bed in which I sleep has been bought for 
 
 moi quand je suis revenue de chez ma tante. Le 
 
 me when I came home from my aunt's. The 
 
 bois de lit est pareil a celui qui est dans la chambre 
 
 bedstead is similar to the one which is in the room 
 
 de ma mere ; la paillasse et les matelas sont de 
 
 of my mother ; the straw-mattress and mattresses are of the 
 
 premiere qualite ; les draps de lit sont de batiste, 
 
 first quality; the sheets are of cambric, 
 
 et les couvertures sont douces an toucher. Le 
 
 and the blankets are soft to the touch. The 
 
 couvre-pied estd'edredon, le traversin et les oreil- 
 
 coverlet is of eider-down, the bolster and pil- 
 
 
MY BOOM. 99 
 
 lers sont de duvet. Apres les fatigues du jour, je 
 
 lows are of down. After the fatigues of the day, I 
 
 suis bien contente d'y reposer ma tete. 
 
 am very glad to there repose my head. 
 
 Le matin quand je m'eveille, j'entends gazouiller 
 
 In the morning when I awake, I hear chirp 
 
 les moineaux, qui viennent recueillir, des alleges 
 
 the sparrows, which come to gather up, from the sills 
 
 de mes fen^tres, les miettes de pain que j'y ai 
 
 of my windows, the crumhs of oread which I there have 
 
 emiettees la veille pour leur dejeuner du lende- 
 
 crumbled the day before for their breakfast for the next 
 
 main. 
 
 morning. 
 
 Je m'endors des que je suis au lit ; mais quel- 
 
 I fall asleep as soon as I am in bed ; but some- 
 
 quefois mon sommeil est trouble par le cauchemar. 
 
 times my sleep is disturbed by the nightmare. 
 
 Quand cela m'arrive, je me reveille en sursaut. 
 
 When that to me happens, I wake up with a start. 
 
 J'entends alors les chats miauler sous mes fenetres, 
 
 I hear then the cats mew under my windows, 
 
 et les chiens aboyer dans l'ecurie. Je me couvre 
 
 and the dogs bark in the stable. I to myself cover 
 
 la tete pour ne rien entendre ; car j'ai peur quand 
 
 the head in order not anything to hear ; for I am afraid when 
 
 je me trouve seule dans l'obscurite. 
 
 I am alone in the dark. 
 
 Une fois reveillee, j'ai de la peine a me rendor- 
 
 Once waked up, I have some difficulty to fall asleep 
 
 mir, surtout quand j'entends les moustiques 
 
 again, especially when I hear the mosquitoes 
 
 bourdonner autour de ma cousin i ere. Je n'aime 
 
 buzz around my mosquito-net. I — like 
 
100 MY ROOM. 
 
 point ces insectes, (lout la piqure me fait bien 
 
 not these insects, whose — sting to me makes great 
 
 mal ; ni les mouches, qui me tourmentent quand 
 
 pain ; nor the flies, which me torment when 
 
 je suis a l'etude. 
 
 I am studying. 
 
 Voila ma chaise a bascule pres de la croisee. 
 
 There is my rocking-chair near the window. 
 
 Dans rapres-micli, quand j'ai fini ma tache, je m ? y 
 
 la the afternoon, when 1 have finished my task, I there 
 
 assieds pour voir les oiseaux voltiger dans la cour, 
 
 sit down to see the birds fly about in the yard, 
 
 et les tourterelles descendre sur le toit de Fecurie. 
 
 and the turtle-doves alight on the roof of the stable. 
 
 J'aime a les voir se caresser et a les entendre 
 
 I like — them to Bee caress each other and — them to hear 
 
 roucouler. 
 
 coo. 
 
 Ici est le bureau ou je prepare mes devoirs de 
 
 Here is the desk at which I prepare my school- 
 
 classe, et la est la commode dans laquelle je serre 
 
 task, and there is the chest of drawers in w hich I put away 
 
 mes effets. Maman est tres-stricte ; elle ne vent 
 
 my things. Mamma is very strict; she does not wish 
 
 pas qu'on laisse trainer sur les chaises quoi que 
 
 that one leaves hanging upon the chairs anything 
 
 ce soit. Elle vient parfois rendre visite a ma 
 
 whatsoever. She comes sometimes to pay a visit to my 
 
 chambre a 1'improviste, et elle serait mecontente 
 
 room unexpectedly, and she would be displeased 
 
 de voir la moindre chose hors de sa place. 
 
 — to see the least thing out of its place. 
 
 J'acheverai cle vous laisser voir mon interieur, 
 
 I will finish you to show my home, 
 
 en ouvrant ce cabinet, qui contient ma garde-robe : 
 
 by opening this closet, which contains my wardrobe : 
 
 robes, jupons, linge, chaussures, et le reste. 
 
 dresses, petticoats, linen, 6hoes, boots, and the rest. 
 
HISTORIETTES. 
 
 1. Les PSches. 
 
 Un ouvrier 1 de la campagne 2 rapporta 3 un jour 
 a sa femme et a ses quatre enfants cinq belles 
 peches. Les enfants voyaient 4 ce fruit pour la 
 premiere fois ; ils en admiraient 5 la fraiche couleur 6 
 et le fin duvet 7 . 
 
 Le soir 8 le pere leur dit 9 : 
 
 " Avez-vous mange le beau fruit que je vOus ai 
 donne* ce matin % 
 
 — Oui, s'ecria l'aine 10 , c'est excellent. Aussi 11 
 j'en ai 12 soigneusement 13 garde le noyau. Je le 
 plant erai 14 , et j'espere qu'il en sortira 15 un arbre. 
 
 — Bien, dit le pere ; c'est une bonne chose que 
 d'etre econome 16 et de penser a l'avenir 17 . 
 
 — Moi, dit le plus petit, j'ai tout de suite 18 
 mange ma peche, et ma mere m'a encore donne la 
 moitie de la sienne 19 . C'etait doux comme du 
 miel 20 . 
 
 — Ah ! repondit 21 le pere ? tu as ete un peu 
 gourmand 22 . Mais a ton age, c'est pardon nable 23 . 
 
 1. The figures refer to the notes, p. , etc. Words which have frequently oc- 
 curred i i the preceding lessons are not repeated in the notes. 
 
102 THE PEACHES. 
 
 Les annees^te corrigeront 25 , j'espere, de ce defaut 26 . 
 
 — Moi, dit un troisieme, j'ai ramasse 27 le noyau 
 que mon petit frere avait jete 28 par terre. Je l'ai 
 brise 29 , et j'y ai trouve une aniande 30 qui avait le 
 gout d'une noix 31 . Mais j'ai vendu 32 ma peche, et 
 avec 1' argent que j'en ai recu 33 , je puis 34 en acheter 35 
 plusieurs autres quand j'irai 36 a la ville." 
 
 Le pere secoua 37 la tete. 
 
 " Cela peut paraitre 38 une ingenieuse idee, mais 
 j'aimerais mieux 39 moins de calcul. Et toi, Ed- 
 mond, as-tu goute 40 ta peche ? 
 
 — Mon pere, repondit Edmond, je l'ai portee 41 
 au fils de notre voisin, au pauvre Georges, qui est 
 malade de la fievre 42 . II ne voulait 43 pas la 
 prendre 44 , mais je l'ai posee 45 sur son lit 46 , et je me 
 suis eloign e 47 . 
 
 — Eh Men 48 , mes enfants, demanda 4J le pere, qui 
 de vous a fait 50 le meilleur usage du fruit que je 
 vous ai donne ? " 
 
 Et trois des gargons s'ecrierent : 
 
 " C'est notre frere Edmond ! " 
 
 Edmond ne disait rien, et sa mere l'embrassa 51 
 avec des larmes 52 dans les yeux 53 . 
 
THE STRAWBERRIES. 103 
 
 2. Les Fraises. 
 
 Un vieux soldat, qui avait une jambe de bois 1 , 
 arriva dans un village a ou il tomba 2 subitement 3 
 malade. Ne pouvant 4 continuer sa route, il fut 
 oblige 5 de se coucher 6 sur la paille 7 dans une 
 grange 8 , et il etait fort a plaindre 9 . La petite 
 Agathe 10 , fille dun vannier 11 tres-pauvre, ressentit 12 
 la compassion la plus vive 13 pour le nmlheureux 
 invalid e 14 . Elle allait le voir 15 tous les jours, et 
 chaque fois elle lui donnait vingt centimes 16 . 
 
 Mais un soir l'honnete soldat lui demanda d'un 
 ton fort inquiet 17 : 
 
 " Ma chere enfant, j'ai appris 18 aujourd'hui que 
 vos parents sont pauvres. Dites-moi 19 done 
 franeliement ou vous trouvez tout cet argent ; car 
 j'aimerais mieux mourir de faini 20 que daccepter 21 
 un centime que vous ne pourriez me donner en 
 bonne conscience 22 . 
 
 — Oh ! repondit Agathe, soyez sans inquietude 23 . 
 Cet argent est legitimement 24 acquis 25 . Je vais a 
 l'ecole dans le bourg 26 voisin. Pour y arriver 27 il 
 me faut 28 traverser un petit bois ou il y a 29 une 
 grande quantite de fraises. Chaque fois que j'y 
 
104 THE CHERRIES. 
 
 passe, j'en remplis 30 un petit panier 31 que je vends 32 
 dans le bourg, et Ton m'en donne 33 vingt centimes. 
 Mes parents savent bien 34 que je vous apporte cet 
 argent, et ils ne s'y opposent point 35 . lis disent 
 souvent qu'il y a des gens 36 encore plus pauvres 
 que nous, et que nous devons 37 leur faire autant 
 de bien 38 que nos moyens 39 nous le permettent." 
 
 Le vieux soldat sentit 40 des larmes d'attendrisse- 
 ment 41 rouler de ses yeux 42 et mouiller ses mous- 
 taches 43 . 
 
 " Grenereuse enfant, s ecria-t-il, que le bon Dieu 
 vous recompense 44 , vous et vos parents, de ces sen- 
 timents d'humanite ! " 
 
 3. Les Cerises. 
 
 Une jeune fille, qui s'appelait Sabine 1 , et dont 
 les parents 2 etaient tres-riches, occupait une 
 chambre meublee 3 avec beaucoup d'elegance, mais 
 d'un aspect desagreable 4 a cause du desordre 5 qui 
 y regnait 6 . Sabine ne la rangeait 7 jamais, et toutes 
 les exhortations que sa mere lui faisait a cet egard 8 
 restaient infructueuses 9 . 
 
 Un dimanche apres-midi, Sabine achevait sa 
 
THE CHERRIES. 105 
 
 toilette 10 et se disposait a sortir quand la fille du 
 voisin lui apporta une corbeille remplie 11 de grosses 
 cerises noires 12 . Comme la table, les chaises, la 
 commode 13 , et meme les tablettes des fenetres 14 
 etaient encornbrees 15 de vetements et d'autres ob- 
 jets, Sabine placa provisoirement 16 la corbeille sur 
 un fauteuil garni 17 d'une etoffe de soie bleue. Puis, 
 elle alia se promener avec sa mere dans le village. 
 Le soir, quand l'obscurite 18 fut venue, elle rentra a 
 la maison et monta aussitot 19 a sa chambre. Comme 
 elle etait fatiguee de la promenade qu'elle avait 
 faite, elle se jeta 20 dans le fauteuil. Mais a peine 
 y eut-elle pris p]ace 21 , qu'elle se rele va brusquement 22 
 en poussant un grand cri d'effroi 23 : elle s etait 
 assise precisement sur la corbeille de cerises. Au 
 cri que la jeune fille avait jete 24 , sa mere accourut 25 , 
 une lumiere a la main 26 . Quel spectacle 27 s'offrit 
 alors a leurs yeux ! Les cerises etaient toutes ecra- 
 sees 28 , un jus noir coulait 29 de tous cotes le long du 
 fauteuil 30 , et la robe neuve de Sabine, une robe de 
 taffetas blanc, en etait tellement endommagee 31 
 qu'elle ne put dorenavant plus servir 32 . La mere 
 voyant cela, reprimanda^ severement sa fille. 
 
106 THE PLUMS. 
 
 "Tu vois maintenant, ajouta-t-elle 34 , combien il 
 est necessaire de ranger sa chambre, et de mettre 
 chaque chose a sa place. Te voila bien punie 35 
 de ta negligence, et de tes habitudes de desordre." 
 
 4, Les Prunes. 
 
 Un jour M me de Hal den etait allee 1 , avec ses 
 quatre enfants, faire visite 2 a leur grand-pere, qui 
 les recut dans son beau jardin. Le vieillard 3 ap- 
 porta sur une feuille de vigne 4 quatre prunes, qui 
 etaient jaunes 5 comme de Tor et aussi grosses que 
 des ceufs 6 . C'etaient les seules 7 qu'il eut trouvees 
 mures 8 . 
 
 "Je vous laisse 9 , leur dit-il en plaisantant 10 , le 
 soin de chercher 11 vous-menies un moyen de parta- 
 ger 12 , sans fraction, ces quatre prunes entre 13 cinq 
 personnes. 
 
 — Oh ! je men charge 14 , repondit Lenore, la plus 
 agee des deux filles. Seulement 15 , permettez-moi 
 de combiner a ma guise 16 les nombres pairs avec 
 les impairs 17 ." 
 
 Alors elle prit 18 les quatre prunes et dit : 
 
 iC Ma scaur, moi et une prune font trois 19 ; mes 
 
THE JAB OF HONEY. 107 
 
 deux freres et une prune font aussi trois ; deux 
 prunes et maman font encore trois 20 . De cette 
 maniere le part age est exact, et il n'y a point de 
 fraction." 
 
 Les freres et la soeur de Lenore furent enchantes 
 de cette repartition 21 . Mais M me de Halden, ravie 
 de 22 l'ingenieuse combinaison que sa fille venait de 
 faire 23 , et surtout 24 de la bonte de co3ur qu'elle 
 venait de niontrer 25 , voulut 26 que chacun de ses 
 enfant s acceptat 27 une prune. Le grand-pere 
 donna, en outre 28 , un beau bouquet a Lenore. "Car, 
 dit-il, si l'ingenieux calcul de ma petite Lenore 
 fait beaucoup d'honneur 29 a son esprit, il en fait 
 plus encore 30 a son coeur filial." 
 
 5, Le Pot de Miel, 
 
 Un jour la mere de la petite Marguerite etait 
 fort occupee dans la cuisine, et elle dit : 
 
 "Mon enfant, va vite me chercher 1 un citron 2 . 
 Voila la clef du garde-manger 3 ." 
 
 Quand la petite fille se trouva dans le garde- 
 manger, elle le parcourut 4 des yeux avec une 
 grande curiosite, pour voir s'il n'y avait pas 
 
108 THE JAR OF HONEY. 
 
 quelque friandise 5 dont elle put 6 se regaler secrete- 
 ment. Elle apercut 7 bientot sur une planche 8 un 
 vase oil elle savait 9 qu'il se trouvait du niiel. Alors 
 elle se hissa 10 sur la pointe des pieds aussi haut 
 quelle put, pour atteindre 11 le pot et y plonger 12 
 le bout du doigt 13 . 
 
 Mais a peine eut-elle introduit le doigt dans le 
 vase qu'elle se sentit pincer 14 d'une uianiere hor- 
 rible. Elle poussa 15 un cri de douleur, retira vive- 
 ment 16 la main, et vit attachee a son doigt une 
 grosse ecrevisse 17 , qui l'avait saisie 18 avec ses 
 pinces 19 et qui ne voulait pas laeher prise 20 . 
 
 En effet 21 , la mere avait vendn le mi el quelques 
 jours auparavant 22 , et comme le pot se trouvait 
 vide 23 , elle y avait depose une quantity d eerevisses, 
 circonstance 24 qu'elle seule connaissait. 
 
 Au cri de sa fille 25 , la mere accourut 26 tout 
 effrayee au garde-manger, degagea 27 des pinces de 
 l'ecrevisse le doigt meurtri 28 de l'enfant, et dit : 
 
 " Que cette legere punition te soit 29 un avertisse- 
 ment utile. La friandise pourrait avoii' pour toi 
 des suites 30 bien plus funestes encore. H n'y a 
 que trop de gens 31 qui, apres setre habitues a ce 
 
THE TURNIP. 109 
 
 defaut pendant qu'ils etaient jeunes, ont depense 32 
 leur argent et detruit 33 leur sante en se livrant a 
 ce niauvais pencliant 34 . 
 
 6. Le Navet. 
 
 Un pauvre journalier 1 avait tire 2 de son potager 3 
 un navet dWe grosseur 4 extraordinaire, et qui 
 faisait 5 l'admiration de tout le monde. 
 
 "Je vais le porter au chateau 6 , dit-il, et en 
 f aire hommage 7 a M. le comte 8 , car il aime extreme- 
 ment que Ton soigne 9 les champs et les jardins." 
 
 II le porta done au chateau. Le seigneur 10 le 
 loua 11 beaucoup de 12 son zele, le remercia de 12 son 
 attention, et lui donna trois pieces dor. 
 
 Un ferraier 13 du meme village, qui etait tres- 
 riche, mais en meme temps tres-avare 14 , entendit 
 parler 15 de ce qui s etait passe 16 . 
 
 "J'ai un veau 17 superbe, dit-il ; je vais a Tins- 
 tant meme 18 le conduire an chateau. Si M. le 
 comte a donne trois pieces dor pour un miserable 
 navet, combien ne m'en donnera-t-il pas pour un 
 veau comme le mien \ " 
 
 Aussitot 19 , il passa une corde au cou 20 de Tani* 
 
110 HONESTY REWARDED. 
 
 mal, le mena au chateau, et pria 21 le seigneur de 
 l'accepter. Mais le comte, qui comprenait fort 
 bien le mobile 22 secret de lavare, refusa d'accepter 
 le present. 
 
 Cependant 23 , le metayer 24 insista et continua de 
 supplier 25 le seigneur de ne pas refuser un si mo- 
 deste liommage. Le comte etait un liomme de 
 grand sens. 
 
 " Eh bien, dit-il, puisque 26 vous le voulez abso- 
 lument, j'accepte votre cadeau 27 . Mais, comme 
 vous etes si genereux en vers 28 moi, je ne veux pas 
 letre moins envers vous. Aussi 29 , je veux vous 
 faire un present qui m'a coute 30 deux fois, et meme 
 trois fois autant 31 que la valeur de votre veau." 
 
 Apres avoir acheve ces paroles, il offrit au pay- 
 san interdit 32 et consterne le gros navet dont il 
 avait entendu parler. 
 
 7. La ProbitS Recompenses 
 
 Dans une petite campagne 1 vivait 2 naguere 3 une 
 pauvre famille de bucherons 4 ; elle etait composee 
 du pere, nomme Jean Morin, de la mere et dune 
 petite fille, seule enfant. A six ans 5 la petite 
 
 
HONESTY REWARDED. Ill 
 
 Marie lisait tres-couramnient et avait appris 6 toutes 
 ses prieres ; elle faisait 7 la joie et l'esperance de 
 ses parents ; mais le malheur devait s frapper bien- 
 tot cette honnete famille, et detruire 9 son avenir 
 de bien-etre et de tranquility. 
 
 Dans le conrant dn mois de juin, la mere Morin 
 vint a mourir 10 , et, deux mois apres, son mari 
 succombait 11 aussi, atteint 12 dune pleuresie. 
 
 La petite Marie se trouvait done orpheline avant 
 l'age de sept ans. Que pouvait devenir 13 cette 
 malheureuse enfant, sans appui 14 , sans asile % 
 Trop jeune encore, et trop faible pour garder les 
 bestiaux 15 des fermes, elle dut 16 mendier pour sou- 
 tenir sa triste existence. 
 
 On ne saurait 17 raconter les souffrances de la 
 jeune Marie, les privations 18 de toutes sortes quelle 
 eut a endurer 19 : le froid, la f aim, le manque d abri 20 , 
 et souvent des paroles dures et brutales 21 . 
 
 Au milieu 22 de ces tribulations, Marie, douce et 
 resignee, n'oublia 23 jamais d elever son coeur vers 
 Dieu, le vrai pere des pauvres. Deux annees 
 s ecoulerent 24 ainsi. Un matin, en passant sur la 
 route de Tours, elle apercut au bord 25 dun fosse, 
 
112 HONESTY REWARDED. 
 
 un portefeuille quelle eut soin 26 de ramasser, avec 
 lmtention bien arretee 27 de le rendre 28 a eelui qui 
 l'avait perdu. Tandis 29 quelle reflechissait aux 
 moyens qu'elle emploierait 30 pour en decouvrir 31 le 
 maitre, un roulier 32 vint a passer. Marie lui de- 
 manda un conseil. Le voiturier 33 ouvrit le porte- 
 feuille et reconnut 34 , par les lettres qu'il contenait, 
 qu'il appartenait 35 a M. le marquis de B.... On y 
 trouvait, entre autres papiers 36 , quarante mille 
 francs en "billets de banque 37 . " H y a la une for- 
 tune, dit l'honnete roulier a l'enfant ; mais nous ne 
 devons point desirer le bien d'autrui 38 , et tu as 
 bien fait, mon enfant, de songer 39 a le rendre. 
 Viens avec moi a Tours, et tu rendras. toi-meme le 
 portefeuille." 
 
 "Arrivee 40 a Tours, la jeune iille se rendit 41 avec 
 le roulier chez le marquis et lui presenta le porte- 
 feuille. Celui-ci 42 le reconnut en effet pour celui 43 
 qu'il avait perdu la veille 44 . 
 
 " Votre probite merite 45 une recompense, dit-il 
 au roulier et a la jeune iille. Yous, pere Simon, 
 vous me devez 46 douze cents francs et les internets 
 de deux ans ; voici votre quittance 47 . Prenez 48 , en 
 
THE OGRE. 113 
 
 outre, ces dix mille francs, et qu'ils vous servent 49 a 
 elever vos enfants dans des sentiments aussi hon- 
 netes que les votres. 
 
 "Et vous, reprit-il 50 , en s'adressant a Marie, 
 vous me permettrez 51 de remplacer les parents que 
 la mort vous a ravis 52 . Je n'avais qu'une enfant, 
 qui aurait votre age 53 ; je l'ai perdue ; remplacez- 
 la ; devenez 54 ma fille d'ad option, et benissez 55 la 
 memoire de votre pere, qui a su 56 vous inspirer des 
 sentiments aussi probes 57 ." 
 
 8. JL'Ogre. 
 
 Deux petits garcons de la ville s'etaient egares 1 
 au fond 2 d'une vaste foret. lis furent obliges de 
 passer la nuit dans une auberge 3 isolee et de mau- 
 vaise apparence. 
 
 Vers minuit 4 ils entendirent parler 5 dans une 
 cliambre voisine 6 de celle oil ils se trouvaient. 
 Tous deux appliquerent l'oreille a la muraille 8 , 
 pour ecouter 9 ce qu'on disait. Ils entendirent 
 distinctement ces paroles : 
 
 "Femme, tu auras soin 10 d'ecurer le chaudron 11 
 
114 THE OGEE. 
 
 demain de bon matin 12 , car je veux couper 13 la 
 gorge a nos deux petits citadins 14 ." 
 
 Les pauvres enfants faillirent 15 mourir de peur 
 en entendant 16 le maitre de la maison parler de la 
 sorte, et ils se dirent 17 tout bas 18 Tun a Tautre : 
 
 "Helas! cet homme est assurement 19 un ogre." 
 En disant ces mots, ils s'approcherent 20 de la fe- 
 netre et sauterent 21 dans la cour pour se sauver 22 . 
 Malheureusement, ils trouverent la porte fermee. 
 
 N'ayant aucun moyen d'echapper, ils se glis- 
 serent 23 dans le trou aux pores 24 , et y passerent le 
 reste de la nuit dans une anxiete impossible a de- 
 crire 25 . Aux premieres lueurs du matin 26 , le maitre 
 de la maison entra daos la cour, ouvrit le trou aux 
 pores, se mit 27 a aiguiser son couteau, et s'ecria : 
 
 "Allons 28 , mes petits gargons, sortez 29 de la, car 
 votre derniere heure est venue ! " 
 
 Les deux enfants pousserent 30 un cri lamentable, 
 et supplierent 31 a deux genoux Thomme de ne pas 
 leur oter la vie 32 . Fort etonne 33 de les trouver 
 dans Tetable a pores 34 , celui-ci leur demanda s'ils 
 le prenaient 35 pour un ogre. 
 
 Les petits gargons lui repondirent : 
 
THE BEGGAR. 115 
 
 " N'avez-vous pas dit vous-meme, cette nuit, a 
 votre fern me, que vous nous couperiez la gorge ce 
 matin ? " 
 
 Alors l'aubergiste 36 s'ecria : 
 
 " Oh ! ]es petits insenses 37 que vous etes ! Ce 
 n'est pas a vous que je pensais 38 . Je voulais par- 
 ler 39 de mes deux cochons de lait 40 , que jappelais, 
 par badinage 41 , mes deux petits citadins, parce que 
 c'est dans la ville que je les ai achetes. Mais 
 voila ce qui arrive 42 quand on ecoute aux portes 
 ou aux murailles. On comprend mal 43 certain es 
 choses, certaines autres nous suggerent 44 de faux 
 soupcons ; on se cree 45 de vaines inquietudes et 
 des craintes chimeriques 46 , et Ton s'attire souvent 
 des chagrins 47 qui n'ont pas de cause. 
 
 9. La Mendiante. 
 
 Dans un temps de famine 1 , par une rude et 
 froide saison d'hiver 2 , une pauvre femme inconnue 3 
 etait entree dans le village, et all ait de porte en 
 porte 4 demander l'aumone 5 . Ses vetements etaient 
 propres 6 , mais tout uses et rapieces 7 en divers en- 
 droits 8 . Comme la.neige tombait en abondance, et 
 
116 THE BEGGAR. 
 
 que le vent soufflait 9 avee force, elle avait serre 10 
 autour de sa tete un mouchoir, qui ne laissait 
 a decouvert 11 qu'une partie du visage. Elle te- 
 nait 12 a la main droite 13 un baton, et au bras 
 gauche 14 elle portait un panier. 
 
 Dans la plupart 15 des maisons on ne lui donnait 16 
 qu'une miserable aumone ; encore 17 la lui passait- 
 on 18 simplement par la f enetre ; il se trouva meme 
 quelques gens riches qui la renvoyerent 19 avec 
 durete. Un seul villageois 20 , Tun des moins aises 21 , 
 la fit entrer 22 dans sa chambre, oil regnait 23 une 
 douce chaleur, et sa femme, qui venait de cuire 24 
 un gateau, en donna un gros morceau a la pauvre 
 mendiante. 
 
 Le lendemain , tous les gens a la porte desquels 
 1 etrangere etait venue 26 demander l'aumone, f urent 
 invites 27 a souper au chateau d'un seigneur fort 
 riche, qui habitait 28 le village. lis ne sattendaient 
 guere 29 a cet honneur. Et ce fut pour eux un 
 sujet 30 de grand etonnement. Lorsqu'ils entrerent 
 dans la salle a manger, ils y virent 31 deux tables, 
 dont Tune etait chargee de mets delicats 32 et choi- 
 sis ; Tautre, beaucoup plus grande, etait couverte 3 ' 3 
 
THE BEGGAR. 117 
 
 d'une quantite d'assiettes, sur lesquelles se trou- 
 vaient seulement, soit 34 un petit morceau de pain 
 moisi 35 , soit 36 une couple de pommes de terre, soit 
 une poignee de son 37 ; sur quelques-unes meme il 
 n'y avait rien du tout 38 . 
 
 Alors la dame du chateau leur dit : 
 " Cette mendiante deguisee 39 qui s'est presentee 
 hier a votre porte, c'etait nioi. 
 
 " Dans le temps de detresse 40 ou nous sommes, 
 et ou le pauvre a tant de peine 41 a trouver de quoi 
 vivre 42 , j'ai voulu mettre a 1 epreuve 43 votre bien- 
 faisance. Les deux braves gens que voici 44 m'ont 
 permis 45 de me rechauffer 46 a leur foyer, et m'ont 
 nourrie 47 aussi bien qu'ils l'ont pu. C'est pour- 
 quoi 48 ils souperont aujourd'hui avec moi, et je 
 leur ferai une pension 49 pour le reste de leurs 
 jours. Quant 50 a vous autres, regalez-vous des 
 aumones que vous m'avez faites ; vous les trouve- 
 rez la, sur ces assiettes. Que ce qui vous arrive 
 aujourd'hui soit 51 pour vous une utile legon, et 
 renechissez (pi'il vous sera fait 52 , dans l'autre 
 monde, selon 53 ce que vous aurez fait, dans celui- 
 ci, a votre prochain 54 ." 
 
118 THE GRASSHOPPER AND THE ANT. 
 
 10. La Cigale et la Four mi. 
 
 La cigale ay ant chante 
 
 Tout l'ete, 
 Se trouva fort depourvue 
 Quand la bise 2 fut venue : 
 Pas un seul petit morceau 
 De mouche 3 ou de vermisseau 4 . 
 Elle alia crier famine 5 
 Chez la fourmi, sa voisine, 
 La priant de lui preter 
 Quelque grain pour subsister 
 Jusqu'a la saison nouvelle. 
 Je vous pairai 6 , lui dit-elle, 
 Avant l'aout 7 , foi d'animal 8 , 
 Interet et principal. 
 La fourmi n'est pas preteuse 9 , 
 C'est la son moindre defaut 10 . 
 Que faisiez-vous au temps cliaud ? 
 Dit-elle a cette emprunteuse 11 . 
 Nuit et jour, a tout venant 12 , 
 Je chantais, ne vous deplaise 13 . 
 Vous chantiez ! j'en suis fort aise 14 . 
 Eh bien ! dansez maintenant. 
 
PART THIRD, 
 
 CONTAINING 
 
 A CORRECT ENGLISH VERSION" OF THE FRENCH EXERCISES 
 IN PART FIRST AND PART SECOND. 
 
A CORRECT ENGLISH VERSION OF THE FRENCH EXER- 
 CISES IN PART FIRST AND PART SECOND. 
 
 2. Charles and Mary. (Page 20.) 
 
 Who lias Mary's thimble ? — Charles has Mary's thimble. — Where 
 is Charles? — Charles is here. — Where is Charles's key? — Charles's 
 key is there. — The thimble and the key. 
 
 4. Papa and Mamma. (Page 21.) 
 
 I see papa and mamma on the sofa. — Here are Charles and Mary. — 
 There is Charles's key on the table. — Where is the chair? — The chair 
 is under the table. — Who is there ? — It is Ann or Eliza. 
 
 7. Tlie Father, Mother, and Child. (Page 22.) 
 
 I see a man, a woman, and a child. — The child has an orange. — The 
 man is the father of the child. — The woman is the mother of the 
 child. — The woman is at the door of the house. — There is a bench 
 under the tree. — I see a garden yonder. 
 
 9. The Garden Gate. (Page 23.) 
 
 I see the gate of the garden. — The man has the key of the garden. — 
 He is going to the garden. — There is the child at the bench. — Has he 
 an orange ? — The woman has a satchel in her hand. — Where is she 
 going ? — She is going into the house. 
 
 12. Henry 9 s Boat. (Page 24.) 
 
 I have a brother and a sister. — My brother's name is Henry. — My 
 sister's name is Julia. — Henry has a boat ; Julia has a doll. — Henry's 
 boat is in the water. — Does it go well ? — It goes very well. 
 
 14. My Uncle and Aunt. (Page 25.) 
 
 I see your father and mother yonder. — Your father is my uncle. — 
 Your mother is my aunt. — I am your cousin. — Julia is my cousin. — 
 There is Henry at the water ; is he playing with his boat ? — Does Julia 
 play with her doll ? — I am going home. — That is well. 
 
122 AN ENGLISH VERSION 
 
 17. The Dog Turco. (Page 26.) 
 I see a large dog ; it is a good dog. — It is called Turco. — There is a 
 large cow ; it is a good cow. — Julia lias a kitten. — Her kitten is very 
 pretty. — Julia is my little cousin. — I have a good little horse. — My 
 little horse goes very well. 
 
 19. The Friends. (Page 27.) 
 I see a boy and a girl. — He is a very good boy. — He is my friend. — 
 His sister is a good girl. — She is my sister's friend. — What have you ? 
 — I have my little boat. — Where are you going ? — I am going to the 
 water with Turco. 
 
 22. The Walk. (Page 28.) 
 I am going for a walk with my uncle. — Do you know that gentle- 
 man? — Yes, uncle ; that is Mr. Lambert. — That lady is his wife. — That 
 young lady is his daughter. — That child is his son Henry. — Henry, 
 are you my friend ? 
 
 24:. The Uncle and the Little One. (Page 29.) 
 Are you tired, Mary ? — No, uncle ; I am not tired. — Where is your 
 friend Anne ? — I do not see her. — She is not here ; she is sick. — Do 
 you know that man ? — Yes, I know him well. — Where is your bag, 
 my dear child ? — I have it ; here it is. 
 
 27. T7ie Nursery, (Page 30.) 
 Where are you ? — We are in the nursery. — Where are the books ; 
 have you them ? — They are here ; I have them. — The pens are on the 
 table, with the copy-books. — We have written. — They have read very 
 well. 
 
 29. Studying. (Page 31.) 
 The children are studying. — I have lost my pencils. — Your brother 
 has found your pencils. — Eliza has not brought her books. — My 
 friends, I saw your uncle and cousins. — Anne saw our uncle and 
 cousins. — Do you know the lesson ? — I do not know it well. — These 
 children do not know their lessons. 
 
 32. To School. (Page 32.) 
 What day is to-day ? — To-day is Monday. — It is nine o'clock. — I am 
 going to school. — What books have you there? — They are my books 
 — What lessons have we ? 
 
OF THE FRENCH EXERCISES. 123 
 
 34. T7ie Days of the Week. (Page 33.) 
 
 How many days are there in a week ? — There are seven days in a 
 week. — On Sunday I go to church. — On Monday I go to school. — On 
 Tuesday I take a music lesson. — On Wednesday I go to see my aunt. — 
 On Thursday I receive my friends. — On Friday I go out with mamma. 
 — On Saturday I go to walk with papa. _ 
 
 37. In the Parlor. (Page 34.) 
 
 Good day, Mr. Lambert ; I saw you this morning. — Good day, Mary. 
 Where did you see me ? — I saw you in Bridge street. — I went shop- 
 ping with my uncle. — I know it. — He bought you something ; did he 
 not ? — Who told you that ? — You told it to the children, and they 
 told me. 
 
 39. TJie Present. (Page 35.) 
 
 Charles, uncle made me a present. — He bought-you a ring. — Eliza 
 told me so. — You must not say anything to Henrietta. — He did not 
 buy anything for her. — For whom did he buy the pretty pencil-case ? 
 — I believe that he bought it for your brother. — There he is, and your 
 sister Ann, too. — I am going to speak to them. — You must speak 
 French. 
 
 42. At Breakfast. (Page 36.) 
 
 Good morning, papa and mamma; I am hungry. — So am I, mamma ; 
 I am hungry and thirsty. — There is bread and butter, my children. — 
 Will you have some meat, Charles ? — No, mamma; I thank you. — Do 
 you drink milk, Mary ? — No, mamma ; water, if you please. — I do 
 not like milk. 
 
 44. After the Meal. (Page 37.) 
 
 I have breakfasted well.— What did you eat ?— I ate bread and 
 meat.— I drank water.— We had some eggs.— Little Henry ate an egg. 
 — Did you have any fruit? — We had oranges. — I like oranges. 
 
 47. At a Picnic. (Page 38 ) 
 
 We will take lunch here under the trees. — I brought some good 
 cake and jelly. — Charles brought apples and pears. — I have no knife. 
 Where are the forks ? — We did not bring any forks. — Who has the 
 glasses and cups ? — Mary has them in her basket. 
 
124 AN ENGLISH VERSION 
 
 49. At the Banquet. (Page 39.) 
 
 Will you have a piece of cake and some jelly ? — Yes ; but I have 
 no glass. — There are cups on the bench. — I have drunk a cup of good 
 milk. — Are you going for water ? — I have been to the brook for water. 
 — Have we sugar and lemons ? — Yes ; but we have no spoons. — I beg 
 your pardon ; we have some small spoons. 
 
 52. T7ie Dance on the Sward. (Page 40.) 
 
 We are going to dance on the grass. — Come, Caroline, will you 
 dance with me ? — There is my cousin. I am going to dance with him. 
 — She will not dance with you. — I have often danced with her. — We 
 will play ball. — Come ; will you play with us ? — I am going to play 
 with them. 
 
 54. The Return. (Page 41.) 
 
 We are going to return home. — I am going to my house. — You are 
 going to your house ; are you not ? — Henry is going to his house, and 
 Julius is going with him. — Julia is going to her aunt's ; her mother is 
 there. — You are going home ; that is well. — We are going with you. 
 — Our friends are going too. 
 
 57. At Work. (Page 42.) 
 
 What are you making ? — I am making something pretty. — I want 
 some black thread ; have you any ? — I have some ; there is some in 
 my bag. — There is some black and some white. — Is there silk thread ? 
 —There is some silk and some cotton. 
 
 59. Tlie Canary -Birds. (Page 43.) 
 
 Is there a canary-bird in that cage ? — There are two. — My aunt likes 
 birds ; she has five. — She is up-stairs, in her room. — My mother is there 
 too. — Are your sisters there ? — No ; they are not there. — Julia is down- 
 stairs, and Mary is out. — Is there anybody in the parlor ? — No ; there 
 is nobody there. 
 
 62. Under the Trees. (Page 44.) 
 
 Charles, are you older than your cousin ? — No ; I am younger than 
 he. — But he is as tall as I. — How old are you ? — I am nine years old, 
 and my cousin is ten. — Are you as strong as he ? — Oh, yes ; he is not 
 so strong as I. 
 
 
OF THE FRENCH EXERCISES. 125 
 
 64. The Race. (Page 45.) 
 
 Can you run as fast as lie ? — I can run faster than he. — Are you as 
 far advanced in your studies ? — No ; he is farther advanced than I 
 am. — Why is he farther advanced than you ? — Because he studies 
 more than I. — Do you not study much? — Yes; but not so much as 
 Charles does. 
 
 67. Mine and Thine. (Page 46.) 
 
 To whom does this handkerchief belong ? — It belongs to me. — I beg 
 your pardon ; it is mine. Julia has taken yours. — There is hers upon 
 the chair. — You have my parasol ; Ann has yours. — She left hers up- 
 stairs. — To whom do these gloves belong ? — I believe that they are 
 mine. 
 
 69. The New Clothes. (Page 47.) 
 
 Your new bonnet is beautiful. — It is more beautiful than mine. — 
 That new coat is fine ; it is a very fine coat. — Her new dress is as 
 beautiful as yours. — There are some fine silk cravats. — To whom do 
 these old shoes belong ? — Your old boots are down-stairs with ours. — 
 They have a handsome house. — Yours is as handsome as theirs. 
 
 72. The Choice, (Page 48.) 
 
 My bonnet is new ; Julia's is old. — Which one is the best ? — My 
 dress is silk ; Mary's is woolen. — Which one do you like best ? — Here 
 are cotton stockings, and there are woolen stockings. — Which ones 
 will you have, the cotton ones, or the woolen ones ? — Here are my 
 rings, and there are Mary's. — Which ones do you think are the pret- 
 tiest ? 
 
 74. Tliese and Those. (Page 49.) 
 
 This coat belongs to me ; that one belongs to Julius. — I like this 
 one better than that one. This dress is silk ; that one is woolen. — I 
 like this one better than that one. — These stockings are cotton ; those 
 are woolen. — These are better than those. — These cups are prettier 
 than those. — I like these better than those. - 
 
 77. The Salutation. (Page 50.) 
 
 Do you know the lady who bowed to us ? — She is the same lady 
 whom you have seen at our house. — She is the one whose child died 
 a few days ago. — There is a gentleman who bows to everybody. — That 
 
126 AN ENGLISH VERSION 
 
 is a gentleman whom I see every day. — He is the one of whom my 
 father has spoken at table. — He has several daughters, all of whom 
 I know. — I see them every time that I go to see my aunt. 
 
 79. An Acquaintance. (Page 51.) 
 
 There is a gentleman who often comes to see us. — He is an acquaint- 
 ance of my uncle. — £ have seen him at my uncle's when I have gone 
 there.— They came from Paris together.— They arrived here a few 
 weeks ago. — My parents have left for the country. — My sisters have 
 gone out ; Charles is at home alone. — I remained at home all the 
 morning. 
 
 82. T7ie Visit. (Page 52.) 
 
 The bell rang and nobody has opened the door. — I beg your pardon ; 
 the girl has gone. — They ask for somebody who does not live here. — 
 I know the person whose address they ask for. — No scholar knew 
 how to answer this question. — They asked every one ; all the class 
 missed it.— I know all ; they have told me everything. 
 
 84. On Horseback and in a Carriage. (Page 53.) 
 
 Our neighbors have been in Paris. — They resided there for a long 
 time. — Their children speak French as well as you do. — They have 
 lived here for a few months. — They drive out every day. — We have 
 lived here a long time. — My cousins are coming here this afternoon. 
 — They are coming on horseback, and are going to stay until to-mor- 
 row. 
 
 87. Sunrise. (Page 54.) 
 
 I rise at sunrise. — Henry goes to bed early, and rises late. — He is 
 still in bed ; he sleeps till eight o'clock. — Julius is up, but he is not 
 dressed yet. — Charles has washed himself; he is dressing now. — My 
 father is up and has gone out long since. — He is soon going to come 
 in to breakfast. 
 
 89. The Departure. (Page 55.) 
 
 I must remain here ; it is too cold to go out. — I rose this morning 
 before six o'clock. — I washed myself and came down immediately. — 
 My sister was already in the parlor. — She was to leave after break- 
 fast. — The carriage was before the door. — It was so cold, and she had 
 a sore throat. — I had toothache. — My mother had a headache. 
 
OF THE FRENCH EXERCISES. 127 
 
 92. On the Ice. (Page 56.) 
 
 Yesterday, we liad a pleasant time ; we were on the ice. — Our 
 friends were there with us. — They had their skates ; they were skat- 
 ing. — You passed us ; you were in a sleigh. — You were going well ; 
 you had good horses. — We went along at a good rate, but we were 
 cold. — We were warm ; we were running continually. — We amused 
 ourselves well. 
 
 94. The Weather. (Page 57.) 
 
 It is bad weather ; it rains.— Yesterday it was cold ; it froze.— Last 
 night it snowed.— This morning the sidewalks were covered with 
 snow.— I like snow better than rain.— Do you know what makes that 
 noise?— Yes; it is the wind in the chimney.— You must not tell 
 Charles what I told you. 
 
 96. Mamma's Birthday. (Page 58.) 
 
 I shall have a pleasant time to-morrow ; it will be mamma's birth- 
 day. — I will make a large nosegay which I will present to her. — I 
 shall carry it to her room when she has risen. — She will be well 
 pleased when she sees me. — And I shall be happy when I see her 
 smile. — 1 shall not go to school ; I shall stay at-home. — I shall receive 
 my friends ; you will be among them. — You will come to see me 
 with your parents. 
 
 99. The Evening Party. (Page 59.) 
 
 We shall have company at our house in the evening. — All our friends 
 will be there, and we shall dance. — We shall amuse ourselves all the 
 evening. — My cousins will come therg with their parents. — You will 
 see them ; you will make their acquaintance. — They will congratulate 
 mamma; they will gladden her heart. — She will be adorned with 
 jewels and flowers.— And as for me, I shall be as happy as I can be. 
 
 102. The Governess. (Page 60.) 
 
 Henry, go for your book and come and say your lesson. — Do your 
 task before you go to play. — Mary, go and find Charles, if you please. 
 —Tell him that some one is asking for him. — Do not tell him that it 
 is I. — Do me the pleasure to make haste. — Do not make me wait, I 
 pray you. — Pay attention to what I say. — Listen to me attentively, and 
 keep still. — Take care of all my things, will you ? — See that no one 
 touches them. — Let us be reasonable, and obey our governess. 
 
128 AN ENGLISH VERSION 
 
 104. Charles and Mary — Continued. (Page 63.) 
 
 Where are Charles and Mary ? — They are there, at the table. — What 
 is on the table ? — It is Charles's key.— What has Charles on his fin- 
 ger ? — He has Mary's thimble on his finger. — Whom do you see on the 
 sofa ? — I see papa and mamma on the sofa. — What is that against 
 the wall ? — It is a small picture. — What is in the middle of the 
 room ? — There is a table in the middle of the room. 
 
 106. The Father, Mother, and Child— Continued. (Page 64.) 
 
 What is there near the bench, under that tree ? — There is a child, 
 who has an orange in its hand. — Who is that man, who is going yon- 
 der ? — He is the child's father ; he is going to the garden. — Is the 
 garden-gate open ? — No ; but he has the key ; he is going to open it. — 
 And who is that woman there ? — She is the man's wife, and the child's 
 mother. — Where is she going with her satchel ? — She is going to carry 
 her satchel into the house. —What is there next to the door of the 
 House ? — There is a little window next to the door. 
 
 108. Henry's Boat — Continued. (Page 65.) 
 
 Who are those children ? — They are my brother and sister. — What 
 are their names ?— My brother's name is Henry, and my sister's name 
 is Julia. — What is Henry holding in his hand? — It is a rope, which 
 is attached to his boat. — And what is Julia holding on her knees ? — 
 She is holding a doll on her knees. — What is she doing with her doll? 
 — She is playing with it, and is looking at Henry's boat. — Whom do 
 you see over there, on the bridge ?— My father and mother, who are 
 coming this way. 
 
 110. T7ie Dog Turco— Continued. (Page 66.) 
 
 There is a beautiful dog, what is his name ? — That is my uncle's 
 dog ; his name is Turco. — To whom does that beautiful cow belong ? 
 — That cow belongs to my aunt. — What is Julia holding in her arms ? 
 — It is a kitten which my aunt gave her. — There is a pretty little 
 horse ; to whom does it belong ? — That is my horse ; I ride upon it 
 every day. — Do you know that little boy and girl yonder ? — Yes ; the 
 boy is my friend ; he comes to see me. — The little girl is his sister ; 
 she comes to play with Julia. — We will go to the water with my little 
 boat. 
 
OF THE FRENCH EXERCISES. 129 
 
 112. The Walk— Continued. (Page 67.) 
 
 It is fine weather this morning ; let us go for a walk. — Let us turn 
 towards the boulevards. — There is a gentleman and lady whom you 
 know. — They are our neighbors with their children. — There are many 
 people before that store. — We will go in and see what they sell there. 
 — What is in those pretty boxes ? — There are pocket-handkerchiefs 
 in them. — There is a handsome fan ; what is the price of it ? — This 
 fan is worth three dollars with the box. — If you like it, Mary, I will 
 buy it for you. — You are very kind, uncle ; I thank you very much. 
 
 114, Tlte Nursery— Continued. (Page 68.) 
 
 We have finished our tasks for to-morrow. — Will you tell us a 
 story ? — I must first see what you have done. — I have made a drawing ; 
 here it is. — A horse ; that is well done ; I am pleased with it. — And 
 you, Mary, have you written your page ? — I have finished, but I have 
 not succeeded well. — The ink is not good ; it is too thick. — You must 
 try to do better next time. — Anne, have you studied your lesson ? — 
 Yes ma'am, I know it by heart. — Then I shall read you a pretty 
 story. 
 
 116. To School— Continued. (Page 69.) 
 
 At what time do you go to school ? — I go at nine o'clock in the 
 morning. — At what time do you come home ? — I come home at two 
 o'clock in the afternoon. — Are you occupied all the time you are 
 there ? — We have half an hour recess at noon. — How many scholars 
 are there in your class ? — I believe there are fifteen. — On what days 
 do you take your music lesson ? — I take it Mondays and Thursdays. — 
 What do you do Saturdays ? — I go out with my father, or I go to see 
 my friends. 
 
 118, In the Parlor — Continued. (Page 70.) 
 
 This is Thursday, Mary, your reception- day. — Mr. Lambert, I am 
 glad to see you. — How is Mr. Lambert ? — My health is good, Miss ; 
 how is yours? — Thank you, sir, I am well ; and Mrs. Lambert? — She 
 is indisposed ; she will not be here'. — Did Louisa remain with her 
 mother ? — I beg your pardon ; she will come with her brother. — I met 
 you yesterday, you and your uncle. — I saw you, but not until you 
 had passed. — We were going shopping. — My uncle was so kind as to 
 buy me a fan. 
 
130 AN ENGLISH VERSION 
 
 120. At Breakfast— Continued. (Page 71.) 
 
 Has the breakfast bell rung ? — It lias just rung, and I am not yet 
 dressed. — Well then, make haste ; I am very hungry. — Do not wait 
 for me ; go down ; I will follow you. — Good morning, mamma ; we 
 are a little late. — It is my fault ; I rose a little too late. — Do you 
 take coffee, niece ? — Thank you, aunt, I take tea. — Will you have 
 meat or fish ? — I will eat a little fish. — And you, Pauline, what will 
 you have ? — I will take an egg, mamma, and a cup of milk. 
 
 122. At a Picnic — Continued. (Page 72.) 
 
 Oh, how nice it is here under the trees ! — Let us sit down on this 
 bench and take lunch. — Put your basket near the tree and unpack it. 
 — Here are cakes and all kinds of good things. — Hand round the nap- 
 kins, and take the glasses out of the basket. — Put them on the grass, 
 here before us. — Pour out some lemonade, and give me a glass of it. — 
 Let us go to the brook for water. — The water from the brook is cool 
 and good. — Carve the chicken and pass the plates. — We have for- 
 gotten the forks ; there are none. — That is nothing; let us use our 
 fingers. 
 
 124:. Hie Dance on the Sward — Continued. (Page 73.) 
 
 If we could dance, that would be charming. — I thought of that ; I 
 brought my violin. — Let us dance a quadrille here in the shade. — 
 Gentlemen, choose partners ; take your places. — You two, place your- 
 selves opposite Henry and Mary. — How so, Frederick, are you to be 
 master of ceremonies ? — Why not ? some one must be. — But do you 
 know how to call off the figures ? — Undoubtedly ; I learned that at 
 dancing-school. — For instance: "Forward two," " Chassez." — "Bal- 
 ance," and so forth. — Here we are ; that will do ; let us begin. 
 
 126. At Work— Continued. (Page 74.) 
 
 How is the work progressing ? does it advance ? — It is advancing 
 rapidly ; I shall finish it to-morrow. — I have still a few flowers to 
 work. — I shall need silk of different colors. — Will you buy me a few 
 skeins ? — There are several spools of silk in your box. — They are not 
 the shades which I want. — I don't know what I have done with my 
 scissors. — There are your scissors in your work-box. — Are there more 
 needles like this one ? — There are needles and pins in that drawer.— 
 Will you hand me that penknife, if you please ? 
 
OF THE FRENCH EXERCISES. 131 
 
 128. Under the Trees— Continued. (Page 75.) 
 
 Do you see the two boys who are running yonder ? — I see them run ; 
 they are my cousins. — John runs the faster, and he is the younger. 
 — What is the difference in their ages ? — Charles is ten years, and 
 John is nine. — Charles is not strong, he is often sick. — That is why 
 he does not go to school at present. — He is not so far advanced as his 
 brother. — Because he cannot study much. — He has had sore eyes for 
 a long time. — They are going to the woods ; shall we follow them ? — 
 I believe it is time to return home. 
 
 130, Mine and Thine — Continued. (Page 76.) 
 
 Do you know where my umbrella is, Charles ? — Yes, yours and 
 mine are at school. — Eliza will not need hers ; take it. — Here is a les- 
 son which I think is very difficult. — Mine is as difficult as yours. — 
 Every scholar thinks his is difficult. — Where are my overshoes ; do 
 you know ? — Yours and mine are down-stairs. — The servant carried 
 them away to clean them. — Tell her to bring them to us immediately. 
 — We want them ; we are going out. — We are going to call upon our 
 friends. 
 
 132. The Choice— Continued. (Page 77.) 
 
 Look at the pretty things, the necklaces and the crosses. — Look, 
 examine, and take your choice. — Here is a gold cross, and there is a 
 chain. — I will take both ; those things go together. — You are right to 
 choose as you do. — And which of these two bonnets do you like best ? 
 — I like the one with the blue ribbons better than the other. — Which 
 of these ribbons do you think are the prettiest ? — I think these are 
 prettier than those. — Tell me which watch is the best ? — The gold 
 one is better than the silver one. — We think alike ; I am glad of it. 
 
 134. The Salutation — Continued. (Page 78.) 
 
 Who is that lady to whom you just bowed? — She is a relative of 
 ours ; she lives near here. — She is the one whose little girl died the 
 other day. — You knew her; she used to go to our school . — We used 
 to call her " Little Close the Eye." — Because she looked as if she 
 was asleep when she was reading. — She was a good girl whom every^ 
 body liked. — When did your aunt return from the country ?— She 
 arrived in town last night. — My cousin Charles came back to town 
 with her. — My cousins remained in the country. — Do not forget totel) 
 Charles to call on me. 
 
132 AN ENGLISH VERSION 
 
 136. The Visit— Continued. (Page 79.) 
 
 Bid you hear the bell ring? — Mary has gone to open the door.— 
 It is a gentleman who asks for your father. — Show him into the parlor, 
 and ask him to be seated. — I believe your father is out. — No matter. 
 Did he give you his card ? — Here it is. His name is Mr. La Borde. — He 
 is a man with white hair, who looks like a physician. — It is the old 
 gentleman whom my father expected. — You will have to tell him that 
 papa is not in. — Ask him to have the kindness to call again to-morrow. 
 — Tell him that papa is always at home at noon. 
 
 138. Sunrise— Continued. (Page 80.) 
 
 This morning I rose before sunrise. — From my window I saw the 
 sun rise. — I washed and dressed myself. — Then I came down to break- 
 fast. — My mother and sister were in the dining-room. — Breakfast was 
 on the table ; we were in a hurry. — My mother and sister were going 
 to start. — After breakfast they left in a carriage. — My mother has 
 gone to take my sister to L. . . . — My sister is to enter a boarding- 
 school there. — She is going to stay there for two or three years. — 
 When she returns, she will speak French. 
 
 140. On the Ice — Continued. (Page 81.) 
 
 Henry, which season do you like best ? — Winter, because then we 
 go skating. — And when there is snow on the ground we go sleigh- 
 riding. — I do not like winter ; I like summer better. — In summer we 
 are in the country, and that is very pleasant. — We do not go to school, 
 and we amuse ourselves all the time. — It is too warm in summer ; I 
 like autumn better. — In autumn it is not so warm, and you feel better. 
 - To me spring is the most beautiful season. — Then the grass shoots 
 up anew, the earth grows green again. — The flowers spring up and 
 the birds sing. — Everything revives and everything rejoices. 
 
 142. Mamma's Birthday— Continued. (Page 82.) 
 
 Which day of the year do you like best ?— The tenth of June, the 
 anniversary of mamma's birthday. — Then I like the fifteenth of May 
 almost as much. — That is the anniversary of papa's birthday. — We 
 also celebrate the sixteenth of April. — It is the anniversary of my 
 parents' wedding-day. — I like Christmas ; it is our Saviour's birthday. 
 — On that day my uncles and aunts dine with us. — And then I like 
 
OF THE FRENCH EXERCISES. 133 
 
 New Year's Day ; it is the day for presents. — Do you not like the 
 fourth of July, the national festival ? — I like the day and the fire- 
 works which they set off in the evening. — But I do not like the noise 
 of the crackers and fire-arms. 
 
 143. A Visit to the Market. (Page 88.) 
 
 Last Saturday I went to the market with my father. I saw there 
 all kinds of vegetables and fruits in large quantities. There were 
 cabbages, cauliflowers, potatoes, ears of corn, turnips, carrots, onions, 
 beans, and peas. 
 
 There were also heaps of melons, barrels of apples and pears, bags 
 of nuts, baskets of peaches and plums, boxes of oranges, lemons, 
 figs, dates, and grapes. 
 
 On another side was butchers' meat, : beef, veal, mutton, and lamb. 
 Farther on was poultry : turkeys, hens, chickens, geese, ducks, and 
 pigeons. 
 
 Around the market were standing wagons and carts, which had 
 brought all these things. 
 
 Everywhere there was a great crowd of people, some of whom 
 had come to sell, others to buy. They all talked constantly. The 
 noise of voices was truly deafening. 
 
 My father wished to take me to the fish-market, but I begged him 
 to take me home again. I was very tired, and so confused that I 
 could not have found my way back, if my father had not been with 
 me. 
 
 144. Our House. (Page 85.) 
 
 Our house is large and convenient. My father had it built for us a 
 few years ago. It has four stories and a basement. Below the base- 
 ment is the cellar, where the coal and firewood are kept. In the cel- 
 lar is a furnace which heats the whole house, by sending hot air into 
 all the apartments, through pipes inclosed in the mason work of the 
 walls. These pipes, which are of sheet-iron or tin plate, lead to open- 
 ings made in the walls of the rooms ; these openings are called regis- 
 ters. You can open and shut them as you wish. 
 
 The basement, which is three feet lower than the level of the street, 
 contains the kitchen and the pantries, and also a large room for the 
 use of the servants. 
 
 On the first floor are the parlor, library, and dining-room. On the 
 second floor, in the front of the house, is my parents' room, and in 
 
134 AN ENGLISH VERSION 
 
 the back, are my room and the nursery. The bath-room is in the 
 centre, between the back room and the front room. 
 
 On the third floor there are four sleeping-rooms, and on the fourth, 
 there are two, and a large open place, which is called a garret, where 
 all kinds of things are put. 
 
 The house has two front doors. One is the basement door. It is 
 in the area below the stoop. To reach it you have to go down four 
 steps. The other door leads to the first floor. It is reached by means 
 of a stone stoop, consisting of eight steps. This door opens into the 
 vestibule. A second door gives access to the interior of the house. 
 Upon entering the hall you have before you, on the left hand, the 
 large staircase which leads to the second story, and on the right, the 
 door of the parlor. Going straight on by the hand-rail which bor- 
 ders the basement staircase, you reach the dining-room door, having 
 on your right a second parlor door, and on your left the servants' 
 staircase, which leads up to the second story, and terminates at the 
 landing in front of the bath-room. 
 
 The water is carried into all the bedrooms on the second and third 
 stories. There are stationary wash-basins of marble, each having 
 two faucets, one for cold, and the other for hot water. 
 
 The house is lighted by gas. From the cellar to the garret, wher- 
 ever it is necessary, there are gas-pipes, to which are attached chan- 
 deliers, tubes, or brackets of metal, with gas-burners. 
 
 There is a yard behind the house, and at the end of the yard are 
 the stable and coach-house, which open into a lane, running to a wide 
 street which crosses the street in which we live at a short distance 
 from our door. 
 
 145. The Parlor. (Page 89.) 
 
 Our parlor is much longer than it is broad. It has two windows 
 which look into the street, two doors that communicate with the hall, 
 and at the lower end a large sliding-door, through which you enter 
 the library. 
 
 The ceiling is very high, and frescoed. The walls are covered with 
 paper, the delicate color of which sets off the gilding of the cornices. 
 The floor is covered with a carpet for which my father sent to Eng- 
 land. 
 
 The furniture, which was renewed last year, has all the gloss of 
 freshness. Sofas, arm-chairs, chairs, stools, tables, consoles, etageres, 
 gueridons, a large piano, and a few statues, which represent gods 
 
 
 
OF THE FttEXCH EXERCISES. 135 
 
 and goddesses of antiquity, all arranged with art and good taste, please 
 the eye by their variety. 
 
 On the mantlepieces, the consoles, the etageres, and the gueridons, 
 are statuettes, vases, and fancy articles. The windows are hung with 
 silk and lace curtains, and the space between them is covered with a 
 mirror which reaches from the ceiling to the floor. The walls are 
 adorned with oil paintings, among which are the portraits of my 
 father and mother, which are perfect likenesses. 
 
 Two large chandeliers, hanging from the ceiling, stretch forth 
 their branches on all sides, and help to form an ensemble which at 
 first seems confused, but which is picturesque and very pleasing, par- 
 ticularly in the evening, when, the gas being lighted, the numerous 
 jets of the chandeliers send forth a flood of light, which dazzles the 
 eyes. 
 
 146. The Library. (Page 91.) 
 
 Let us now enter the library by the door which is at the lower end 
 of the parlor. The large bow-window which is opposite the door, 
 at the other extremity of the room, looks into the yard. This door 
 to the left communicates with the dining-room. 
 
 The large cupboard on the right, which fills the space between the 
 wall and the mantlepiece, contains a large number of rare objects, 
 which my father has collected during his several visits to Europe. 
 
 On the mantlepiece are two busts and a time-piece. On the other 
 side of the mantlepiece, set against the wall, is a secretary, at which 
 my father is in the habit of working in the morning. 
 
 Against the wall to the right of the bow-window is an ottoman, 
 where my mother often comes to rest herself and to converse with 
 my father, when he is seated at his secretary. 
 
 To the left of the bow-window there is a desk, on which is an ink- 
 stand. In the drawers of the desk are letter-paper, envelopes, and 
 postage-stamps. This is where my mother comes to write her letters. 
 
 The wall on the side toward the dining-room, from the door to the 
 corner, is occupied by a large book-case, the shelves of which are 
 filled with books. 
 
 Against the wall, over the mantlepiece, is the portrait of my pater- 
 rial grandmother, and against the wall above my father's secretary, 
 is the portrait of my paternal grandfather. The portraits of my 
 grandparents on my mother's side are on the two sides of the bow 
 window, one on the right, above the ottoman, the other on the left, 
 above the desk. 
 
130 AN ENGLISH VERSION 
 
 In the middle of the room is a table covered with green cloth. 
 Some arm-chairs ranged around the table and placed here and there 
 against the walls, and a foot-step, which is used to reach the upper 
 shelves of the book-case, complete the furniture of what my father 
 calls his study. 
 
 147. The Dining-room. (Page 93.) 
 
 The dining-room is next to the library. It has two doors and a 
 bow-window, precisely similar to the one in the next room. The 
 principal door communicates with the hall ; then there is a side- door 
 which opens into the library. 
 
 The following are the objects which first present themselves to the 
 eye, on entering by the principal door : in the centre a long dining- 
 table, arm-chairs placed to the right and to the left ; two side-tables 
 set against the wall on the left side ; farther on, in the corner near the 
 window, a sofa ; and in the other corner, opposite the sofa, a table. 
 Between the table and the sofa, and in front of the window, is a 
 flower-stand, on which there are a great many pots with flowers. 
 
 You notice particularly my mother's favorites, hyacinths, carna- 
 tions, geraniums, and roses. The walls are adorned with engravings 
 in gilded frames. On the mantlepiece are vases filled with flowers, 
 a time-piece, and statuettes of bronze. 
 
 On one side of the principal door is the servants' door, and on the 
 other there is a closet, in which everything is kept that is necessary 
 for the table ; the plate, dishes of every size, plates, soup-tureens, 
 salad-dishes, cruets, salt-stands, coffee-pots, tea-pots, cups and saucers, 
 sugar-bowls, butter-dishes, pitchers, milk-pots, spoons, knives and 
 forks ; finally, the table-linen, table-covers, napkins, and other things, 
 which I cannot name. 
 
 148. Tlie Kitchen. (Page 95.) 
 
 We must also pay a visit to the basement, I do not often go in 
 that underground place, but to amuse you we shall go and pass in 
 review all the kitchen apparatus. 
 
 You will see our stout cook, who reigns with supreme authority 
 over the pots and pans. Her stentorian voice is heard in her domain 
 as soon as things do not go to her liking. If her assistant, the 
 dish-washer, lets grease or ashes fall on the oil-cloth which covers 
 the floor, or lets the broom, the pail, the feather- duster, the shovel, 
 
OF THE FRENCH EXERCISES. 137 
 
 the poker or tongs lie about out of their places, stout Mary, as we call 
 her, scolds her, and often gives it to her over the ears with the dish- 
 cloth. 
 
 She wants everything to be in good order and in its place. I must 
 also tell' you that the work is well done. You will easily notice the 
 neatness of the range, with its ovens, and the brightness of all the 
 utensils, such as saucepans, stewpans, pipkins, spits, roasting-screens, 
 kettles, chafing-dishes, skimmers, and boilers, all disposed in shining 
 and polished rows. 
 
 The room adjoining is the wash-room. The washerwoman is there 
 now doing the washing. The stationary wash-tubs have taps for cold 
 and hot water. The hot water is drawn from the large copper boiler 
 which you see in the corner above the sink. The dirty water runs 
 off in the sewers underground. 
 
 The ironing is done in the next room. You see through the glass 
 windows the smoothing-irons, which are heating. The seamstress 
 examines the clean linen which has come in from the washing, and 
 puts aside the articles which need mending. But enough of this. Let 
 us go up again. 
 
 149. My Boom. (Page 98.) 
 
 Come, Lucy, follow me ; we will go up to my room. We shall be 
 able to chat there at our ease, without any one coming to interrupt us. 
 Here you are at my home, my dear friend ; this is my bower, where 
 I come to meditate and muse during my leisure hours. 
 
 There is my kneeling-stool, at which I say my prayers, in the morn- 
 ing when I rise, and in the evening before I go to bed. The bed in 
 which I sleep was bought for me when I came home from my aunt's. 
 The bedstead is similar to the one which is in my mother's room ; the 
 straw mattress and mattresses are of the best quality ; the sheets are 
 of cambric, and the blankets are soft to the touch. The coverlet is of 
 eiderdown, the bolster and pillows are of down. After the fatigues 
 of the day, I am very glad to rest my head there. 
 
 In the morning when I awake I hear the sparrows chirp, as they 
 come to gather up, from the sills of my windows, the crumbs of bread 
 which I have crumbled there the day before, for their next morning's 
 breakfast. 
 
 I fall asleep as soon as I am in bed ; but sometimes my sleep is 
 disturbed by the nightmare. When that happens, I wake up with a 
 start. Then I hear the cats mew under mv windows, and the dogs 
 
138 AN ENGLISH VERSION OF THE FRENCH EXERCISES. 
 
 bark in the stable. I cover my head so as not to hear anything, fori 
 am afraid when I am alone in the dark. 
 
 Once waked up, I have some difficulty in falling asleep again, es- 
 pecially when I hear the mosquitoes buzz around my mosquito-net, 
 I do not like these insects, whose sting gives me great pain ; nor the 
 flies, which torment me when I am studying. 
 
 There is my rocking-chair near the window. In the afternoon, 
 when I have finished my task, I sit down there to watch the birds fly 
 about in the yard, and the turtle-doves alight on the roof of the sta- 
 ble. I like to see them caress each other and to hear them coo. 
 
 Here is the desk at which I prepare my school-task, and there is the 
 chest of drawers in which I put away my things. Mamma is very 
 strict ; she does not, wish me to leave anything whatever hanging 
 upon chairs. She sometimes comes unexpectedly to pay a visit to my 
 room, and she would be displeased to see the least thing out of its 
 place. 
 
 I will finish showing you my home by opening this closet, which 
 contains my wardrobe : dresses, petticoats, linen, boots, shoes, and 
 the rest. 
 
NOTES ON HISTORIETTES (Stories). 
 
 1. Les Peches (T7ie Peaches). 
 1. Un ouvrier, a laborer. 2. la eampagne, the country. 3. rap- 
 porta, brought Jwme, from rapporter, to bring back ; to bring home. 
 4. voyaient, saw, from voir, to see. 5. ils en admiraient, they ad- 
 mired of them. 6. la fraiche couleur, the fresh color. 7. le flu du- 
 vet, the fine down. In English : they admired their rosy color and 
 fine down. 8. le soir, in the evening. 9. dit, said, from dire, to say ; 
 to tell. 10. s'ecria Paine, exclaimed the eldest. 11. aussi, therefore. 
 12. j'en ai garde le noyau, Ihave kept the stone {of it). 13. soigneuse- 
 ment, carefully. 14. je le planterai, / shall plant it. 15. qu'il en 
 sortira, that there will spring up from it 16. que d'etre econome, 
 to be saving. 17. de peuser a l'avenir, to think of the future. 18. tout 
 de suite, immediately. 19. la moitie de la sienno, one half of hers. 
 20. doux comine le niiel, sweet as honey. 21. repondii, answered, from 
 repondre, to answer. 22. un pen gourmand, rather greedy. 23. c'est 
 pardonnable, it is excusable. 24. les annees, the years, for le temps, 
 time. 23. te corrigeront, will cure thee. 26. de ce defaut, of that 
 fault. 27. ramasse, picked up. 28. jete p ir terre, thrown on the 
 ground. 29. brise, broken, from briser, to break. 30. une amaude, 
 a kernel. 31. qui avait le gout d'une noix, which tasted like a nut. 
 32. veudu, sold, from vendre, to sell. 33. j'en ai recu, I have received 
 for it; recu, from recevoir, to receive. 34. je puis, lean, from pou- 
 voir, to be able. 35. en acheter, buy (of them). 36. j'irai, / shall 
 go, from aller, to go. 37. secoua la tete, shook his head. 38. pent 
 paraitre, may appear ; peut, from pouvoir, to be able. 39. j'aimerais 
 mieux, I would like better, from aimer mieux, to like better. 40. goii- 
 te, tasted. 41. portee, carried. 42. maladj de la flevre, sick with a 
 fever. 43. il ne voulait pas, he would not ; voulait, from vouloir, to 
 be loilling. 44. prendre, to take. 45. posee, laid. 46. lit, bed. 
 
 47. je me suis eloigne, i" went away, from s'eloigner, to go away. 
 
 48. eh bien ! ivell ! 49. demantla, inquired. 50. a fait, has made, 
 from faire, to make, to do. 51. embrassa, kissed. 52. des larmes, 
 tears. 53. dans les yeux, in her eyes. 
 
140 NOTES ON HISTORIETTES. 
 
 2, Les Fraises (The Strawberries). 
 1. Une jambe de bois, a wooden leg. 2. tomba, from tomber, to 
 fall ; tomba malade, was taken sick. 3. subiteinent, suddenly. 
 
 4. pouvant, from ponyoir, to be able ; ne ponyant, not being able. % 
 
 5. oblige de, obliged to. 6. se coucher, lie down. 7. la paille, the 
 straw. 8. une grange, a granary. 9. a plaindre, to be pitied. 10.1a 
 petite Agathe, little Agatha. 11 nn yannier, a basket-maker. 
 12. ressentit, felt, from ressentir, to feel. 13. la compassion la plus 
 vive, the greatest compassion. 14. le malhenreux invalide, the un- 
 fortunate invalid. 15. elle allait le voir, she icent to see him. 16. yingt 
 centimes, twenty centimes (four cents of our money\ 17. d'un ton 
 fort inquiet, in a wry uneasy tone. 18. j'ai appris, I have heard; 
 appris, from apprendre, to learn; to hear. 19. dites-moi done, 
 tell me then. 20. j'aimerais mieux mourir de faim, I would rather die 
 of hunger. 21. que d'accepter, than accept. 22. que yous ne pourriez 
 me donner en bonne conscience, which you could not give me with a 
 clear conscience. 23. soyez sans inquietude, be without uneasiness (do 
 not be uneasy). 24. legitimement, rightfully. 25. acquis, acquired, 
 from acquerir, to acquire, to come by. 26. bourg, town. 27. pour y 
 arriver, to get there. 28. il me faiit, I must, or I have to. 29. oh il 
 y a, where (liere) are. 30. pen remplis, Ifitt {with them). 31. panier, 
 basket. 32. je vends, I sell, from vendre, to sell. 33. et Pon m'en 
 donne, and they give me for them. 34. savent Men, know well, from 
 sayoir, to know. 35. ne s'y opposent point, are not opposed to it. 
 36. des gens, people. 37. nous devons, ice slwuld. 38. autant de 
 bien, as much good. 39. moyens, means. 40. sentit, felt, from 
 sentir, to feel. 41. des larines d'attendrissenient, tears of emotion. 
 42. rouler de ses yeux, drop from his eyes. 43. mouiller ses 
 moustaches, moisten his moustache. 44. que le bon Dieu vous re- 
 compense, may the good God reward you. 
 
 3, Les Cerises (The Cherries). 
 1. Qui s'appelait Sabine, who was called Sabina. 2. dont les 
 parents, whose parents. 3. une chambre meublee, a room furnished. 
 
NOTES ON HISTORIETTES. 141 
 
 4. (Pun aspect desagreable, unpleasant to look at. 5. a cause du 
 desordre, on account of the disorder. 6. qui y regnait, which pre- 
 vailed in it. 7. rangeait, put in order, from ranger, to arrange, to 
 put in order. 8. a cet egard, in regard to it. 9. infructueuses, 
 fruitless. 10. achevait sa toilette, was finishing her tuilet. 11. une 
 corbeille remplie de, a basket filled with. 12. cerises noires, black 
 cJterries. 13. commode, bureau. 14. tablettes des fenetres, window- 
 sills. 15. encombrees de vetenients, covered with clothing. 16. pro- 
 visoirement, for the time. 17. fan to nil garni de, arm-chair covered 
 with. 18. quand l'obscurite fut venue, when darkness had come ; in 
 English, when it had grown dark. 19. aussitot, immediately. 20. elle 
 se jeta, she threw Iterself. 21. a peine y eut-elle pris place, scarcely 
 had she taken her seat. 22. qu'ell^ se releva brusquement, when she 
 suddenly arose. 23. cri d'effroi, cry of horror. 24. avait jete, had 
 uttered. 25. accourut, hurried up. 26. une lumiere a, la main, with 
 a light in her hand. 27. quel spectacle, what a sight. 28. ecraseos, 
 crushed. 29. un jus noir coulait, a black juice ran. 30. de tous 
 cotes le long du fauteuil, on all sides down the arm-chair. 31. tene- 
 ment endommagfee, so much damaged. 32. qu'elle ne put plus 
 servir, that it could ', ot be used any more. 33. rtprimanda. scolded. 
 34. ajouta-t-elle, she added. 35. te Yoila Men punie de, now you are 
 well punished for. 
 
 4, Les Prunes {The Plums). 
 
 1. ^tait allee, went. 2. faire vi»ite a, to call on. 3. le vieillard, 
 the old gentleman. 4. une feuille de vigne, a grape-vine leaf. 
 5. jaunes, yellow. 6. aussi grosses que des 03ufs, as large as eggs. 
 7. les seules, the only ones. 8. qu'il eut tronvees mures, which he 
 had found ripe. 9. je vous laisse, I leave you. 10. en plaisantant, 
 jokingly. 11. chercher, to seek ; to find. 12. p.artager, to divide. 13. 
 entre, among. 14. je m'en charge, I undertake {to do) it. 15. seule- 
 ment, only. 16. de combiner a ma guise, to combine in my way. 
 
 17. les nombres pairs avec les impairs, the even and odd numbers. 
 
 18. elle prit, she took, from prendre, to take. 19. font trois, are 
 
142 NOTES ON BJSTORIETTES. 
 
 three. 20. font encore trois, are three again. 21. repartition, divi- 
 sion. 22. ravie de, delighted with. 23. venait de faire 5 had just 
 made. 24. surtont, especially. 25. venait de niontrer, had shown. 
 26. Toulnt que, wislied that. 27. acceptat, should accept. 28. en 
 outre, besides. 29. fait beaucoup d'honneur a son esprit, does much 
 honor to her mind. 30. il en fait plus encore, it does still more. 
 
 5, Le Pot de Miel {Hie Jar of Honey). 
 
 1. Ya vite me chercher, go quickly and bring me. 2. un citron, a 
 lemon. 3. garde-manger, pantry. 4. parconrut des yeux, she 
 looked all around, from parcourir, to run over, to wander over. 
 5. friandise, dainty. 6. dont elle put, icith which site might. 
 7. apercut, perceived. 8. planche, shelf. 9. elle savait, she knew. 
 10. se hissa, raised herself up. 11. pour atteindre, to reach. 12. y 
 plonger, to dip in it. 13. le bout du doigt, the tip of her finger. 
 14. pincer, nipped. 15. poussa on cri, uttered a cry. 16. retira 
 yivement, withdrew quickly. 17. une grosse ecreyisse, a large crab. 
 18. saisie, seized. 19. pinces, claws. 20. laclier prise, release its 
 hold. 21. en effet, indeed. 22. anparayant, before. 23. Tide, empty. 
 24. circonstance, a circumstance. 25. an cri de sa fille, at the cry of 
 her daughter. 26. acconrut, ran. 27. degagea, freed. 28. le doigt 
 nieurtri, the bruised finger. 29. te soit un avertissement, be a lesson 
 to thee. 30. des suites bien plus funestes encore, still far more fatal 
 consequences. 31. gens, people. 32. defense, spent. 33. detruit, 
 destroyed. 34. en se livrant a ce mauvais penchant, by yielding to 
 this bad habit. 
 
 6, Le Navet {The Turnip). 
 
 1. journalier, day-laborer. 2. tire de, taken out of. 3. potager, 
 kitchen-garden. 4. grosseur, size. 5. faisait, teas. 6. chateau, 
 castle. 7. en faire homuiage, present it. 8. a M. le conite, to the count. 
 9. que l'on soigne, that people should attend. The sentence is 
 rendered in English : he likes very much to have t\e fields and gardens 
 
NOTES ON IIISTORIETTES. 143 
 
 well attended to. 10. le seigneur, the lord. 11. loua, praised. 12. de 5 
 for. 13. fermier, farmer. 14. avare, miserly. 15. entendit parler 
 de, heard. 16. ce qui s'etait passe, what had happened. 17. vean, 
 calf. 18. a l'instant meme, this very instant. 19. aussitot, imme- 
 diately. 20. au cou, round tlie neck. 21. et pria, andbegged. 22. le 
 mobile secret, the secret motive. 23. cependant, however. 24. me- 
 tayer, farmer. 25. de supplier, to supplicate. 26. puisque, since. 
 27. cadeau, present. 28. envers moi, towards me. 29. aussi, «■&<?, 
 likewise. 30. coute, c<?^. 31. autant que, as much as. 32. interdit 
 et consterne, astonished and dismayed. 
 
 7. Lcl ProbitS Recompensee {Honesty Rewarded). 
 1. campagne, country-place. 2. vivait, lived, from vivre, to fe«e. 
 3. naguere, not long ago. 4. bucheron, wood-cutter. 5. a six ans, at 
 the age of six years. 6. appris, learned, from apprendre, to learn. 
 7. faisait, teas. 8. devait frapper, was to strike. 9. detruire, to des- 
 troy. 10. vint a mourir, died. 11. succombait, died. 12. atteint 
 d'une pleuresie, from an attack of pleurisy. 13. devenir, become of. 
 14. sans appui, icitJwut protection. 15. garde r les best iaux, keep the 
 cattle. 16. elle dut mendier, slie had to beg. 17. on ne saurait, one 
 cannot. 18. privat'-ons, privations. 19. endurer, to endure. 20. le 
 manque d'abri, a want of shelter. 21. des paroles dures et brutales, 
 harsh and brutal words. 22. au milieu, in the midst. 23. n'oublia 
 jamais, never forgot. 24. s'tconlerent ainsi, were spent thus. 25. au 
 bord d'un fosse, on the edge of a ditch. 26. qu'elle eut soin de ra- 
 masser, which she took care to pick up. 27. l'intention bien arretee, 
 with a firm purpose. 28. rendre, to give back. 29. tandis qu'elle, 
 while she. 30. emploierait, should employ. 31. pour en decouvrir le 
 maitre, to find its owner. 32. ronlier, wagoner. 33. Toiturier, 
 driver. 34. et reconnut, and ascertained. 35. qn'il appartenait, 
 that it belonged. 36. entre a litres papiers, among other papers. 
 37. en billets de banque, in bank-notes. 38. le bien d'autrui, the 
 property of otliers. 39. de songer a, to think of. 40. arrivee, having 
 arrived. 41. se rendit, went, from se rendre, to go, to betake one's 
 
144 NOTES ON HISTORIETTES. 
 
 self. 42. celui-ci, the latter. 43. celui, the one. 44. la veille, the 
 day before. 45. merite, deserves. 46. vous me devez, you owe me. 
 47. voici yotre quittance, here is your receipt. 48. prenez, take. 
 49. qu'ils tous servent, may they help you. 50. et vous, reprit-il, 
 and as for you, lie resumed. 51. vous me permettrez, you will allow 
 me. 52. vous a ravis, has taken away from you. 53. qui aurait 
 Yotre age, who would be of your age. 54. devenez ma fllle d'adop- 
 tion, become my daughter by adoption. 55. bfcnissez, bless. 56. qui 
 a su, who knew how. 57. aussi probes, so honest. 
 
 8. JJOgre {The Ogre). 
 1. S'etaient 6gares, had lost their way. 2. au fond, in the depths. 
 3. auberge isolee, isolated inn. 4. vers minuit, towards midnight. 
 5. entendirent parler, heard speaking. 6. voisine de celle, next to 
 that. 7. appliquerent Poreille, applied the ear. 8. muraille, wall. 
 9. pour ecouter, to listen. 10. soln, care. 11. d'ecurer le chaudron, 
 to scour tJie kettle. 12. deinain de boa mat in, early in the morning. 
 13. couper la gorge, cut the throat. 14. citadins, cits. 15. faillirent 
 mourir, almost died of flight. 16. en entendant, when they heard. 
 17. ils se dirent, they said to one another. 18. tout bas, in a low 
 voice. 19. assureinent, surely. 20. ils s'approcherent, they drew 
 near. 21. sauterent dans, leaped into. 22. pour se sauver, to make 
 their escape. 23. ils se glisserent, they slipped. 24. trou aux pores, 
 pig-sty. 25. impossible a decrire, impossible to describe. 26. aux 
 premieres lueurs du matin, at the first glimmer of morning. 27. se 
 mit a aiguiser, began to sharpen. 28. allons, come now. 29. sortez 
 de la, come out. 30. pousserent, uttered. 31. snpplierent a deux 
 genoux, begged on both knees. 32. leur oter la Tie, take their lives. 
 33. fort etonne, very much astonished. 34. etable a pores, pig-sty. 
 35. s'ils le prenaient pour, if they took him for. 36. aubergiste, 
 innkeeper. 37. les petits insenses, the little fools. 38. pensais, was 
 thinking. 39. je voulais parler, / was speaking. 40. coehons de 
 lait, sucking pigs. 41. par badinage, jokingly. 42. ce qui arrive, 
 which happens. 43. on comprend inal, one misunderstands. 44. nons 
 
NOTES ON IIISTORIETTES. 14o 
 
 mx s aprons, awaken false suspicions in us. 45. on 
 se cree, one imagines. 46. craintes chimeriqups, chimerical fears. 
 47. et Pon s'at ire souvent des chagrins, and one of ten brings upon 
 
 one's self griefs. 
 
 9. La Mendirmte {The Beggar). 
 
 1. Temps de famine, time of famine. 2. saison d'hiver, winter 
 season. 3. inconnue, unknown. 4. de porte en porte, from door to 
 door. 5. demander ran in one, ask alms. 6. propre, neat. 7. ra- 
 pieces, mended. 8. en divers endroits, in many places. 9. le vent 
 sonfflait, the wind teas blowing. 10. serre, tied. 11. a decouvert. 
 uncovered. 12. tenait, was holding. 13. droite, right. 14. gauche, 
 left. 15. la plupart, most. 10. on ne lui dounait qu'une, they gave 
 Iter only. 17. encore, and. 18. la lui passait-on, they handed it to 
 Iter. 19. renvoyerent, sent away. 20. viilageois, villager. 21. l'un 
 des moms aises, one of the least wealthy. 22. la fit entrer dans, made 
 her enter. 23. oil regnait u ne donee chaleur, in ichich it felt comfortably 
 warm. 24. cnire, to bake. 25. le lendemain the next day. 26. venue, 
 had come. 27. invites a souper, invited to supper. 28. liabitait, 
 dwelt in. 29. ils ne s'attendaient guere, they little expected. 30. su- 
 jet de, cause for. 31. ils y virent, they saw. 32. chargee de mets 
 delicats, loaded with dainty dishes. 33. couYerte, covered. 34. soit, 
 either. 35. pain moisi, mouldy bread. 36. soit, or. 37. une poignee 
 de son, a, handful of bran. 38. rien da tout, nothing at all, 
 39. mendiante deguisee, disguised beggar. 40. temps de <:etresse, 
 time of distress. 41. tant de peine, so much trouble. 42. de quoi 
 vivre, the means of subsistance. 43. a l'epreuve, to the test. 44. les 
 deux braves gens que voici, these two worthy people. 45. m'ont permis, 
 allowed me. 46. me recliauffer, to tcarm myself 47. nourrie,/e& 
 48. e'est pourquoi, that is the reason why. . 49. je leur feral uue 
 pension, I will give them a pension. 50. quant a vous autres, as to 
 you. 51. que ce soit pour vous. letitbetoyou. 52. qu'il vous sera 
 fait, that you will be treated. 53. selo *, according as. 54. a votre 
 prochaiu, to your neighbor. 
 
146 NOTES ON HISTORIETTES. 
 
 10. La Clgale et la Fourmi {The Grasshopper and the Ant). 
 
 1. D6pourvue, destitute. 2. bise, north wind; quand la bise fat 
 Tenue, wlien cold weather Jmd set in. 3. niouche, fly. 4. Termisseau, 
 little grub. 5. elle alia crier famine, she went to cry famine, that is : 
 she icent to complain of Iter poverty. 6. j;; yous pairai (payerai), / 
 shall pay you. 7. avaat l'aout, before August, before harvest. 8. foi 
 d'animal, on the faith of an animal, that is : upon the honor of a 
 gentleman. 9. preteuse, lender. 10. sou aioiudre defaut, her least 
 fault. 11. emprunteuse, borrower. 12. nuit et jour, a tout Tenant, 
 day and night, to all who came 13. ne Tons deplaise, by your leave. 
 14. j'en suis fort aise, I am very glad of it. 
 
PAET FOUETH. 
 
 THE PARTS OF SPEECH. 
 
 In French as in English there are ten different kinds of words, 
 which are called Parts of Speech ; they are : 
 
 1. The Noun, 6. The Participle, 
 
 2. The Article, 7. The Adverb, 
 
 3. The Adjective, 8. The Preposition, 
 
 4. The Pronoun, 9. The Conjunction, 
 
 5. The Verb, 10. The Interjection. 
 
 Definition of the Parts of Speech. 
 
 1. A Noun is the name of a person, place, or thing ; as, Washing- 
 ton, Pari*, city. 
 
 2. An Article is a word placed before a noun to limit its meaning ; 
 as, the tree, a tree. 
 
 3. An Adjective is a word added to a noun, to describe or limit it; 
 as, a large tree, which tree ? that tree. 
 
 4. A Pronoun is a word that is used in place of a noun ; as, /have 
 your book ; you have mine. 
 
 5. A Verb is a word that expresses action or being ; as, to write, 
 to live. 
 
 6. A Participle is a part of the verb which is also used as an adjec- 
 tive ; as, fields covered with snow, gliiteHng in the sun. 
 
 Rem. The participles are given with the verb. 
 
 7. An Adverb is a word that expresses manner, time, place, etc. ; 
 as, he writes well ; I see him often ; he is here. 
 
 8. A Preposition is a word used to express some relation of differ- 
 ent things or thoughts to each other ; as, the book lies before me on 
 the table. 
 
 9. A Conjunction is a word used to connect words or sentences ; as, 
 you and he are happy, because you are good. 
 
 10. An Interjection is a word that denotes a sudden emotion of the 
 mind ; as, ah! alas! 
 
148 
 
 THE NOUN. 
 
 I, The Noun. 
 
 (1.) 
 
 Masculine. 
 un homme, a man ; 
 tin bceuf, an ox ; 
 un chat, a cat ; 
 un oiseau, a bird ; 
 un poulet, a chicken ; 
 un insecte, an insect ; 
 un village, a village ; 
 un jar din, a garden ; 
 un arbre, a tree ; 
 un miroir, a looking-glass ; 
 un fauteuil, an arm-chair ; 
 un canape, or sofa, a sofa ; 
 
 Gender. 
 
 Feminine. 
 une femme, a woman, 
 une vache, a cow. 
 une souris, a mouse. 
 une oie, a goose. 
 une poule, a hen. 
 une mouche, a fly. 
 une ville, a town ; a city. 
 une maison, a house. 
 une feuille, a leaf. 
 une pendule, a time-piece, 
 une chaise, a chair. 
 une commode, a chest of drawers. 
 
 (2.) 
 Singular. 
 un homme, one man ; 
 une femme, one woman ; 
 un arbre, one tree ; 
 une feuille, one leaf ; 
 
 Number. 
 
 Plural. 
 des hommes, men. 
 des femtnes, women. 
 des arbres, trees. 
 des feuilles, leaves. 
 
 un bas, a stocking ; 
 un bras, an arm ; 
 un tapis, a carpet ; 
 une croix, a cross ; 
 
 des bas, stockings. 
 des bras, arms, 
 des tapis, carpets. 
 des croix, crosses. 
 
 un chapeau, a hat ; 
 un couteau, a knife 
 un gateau, a cake ; 
 un feu, a fire ; 
 un jeu, a game ; 
 
 des chapeaux, hats. 
 des couteaux, knives. 
 des gateaux, cakes, 
 des feux, fires. 
 des jeux, games. 
 
 un cheval, a horse ; 
 un animal, an animal 
 un general, a general 
 
 des chevaux, horses, 
 des animaux, animals. 
 des generaux, generals 
 
 1 
 
ARTICLE— ADJECTIVE. 149 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 un clou, a nail ; des clous, nails. 
 
 un chou, a cabbage ; des choux, cabbages, 
 
 un bijou, a jewel ; des bijoux, jewels. 
 
 II. The Article 
 
 FORMS OF THE ARTICLE BEFORE NOUNS. 
 
 (1.) Before a Masculine Noun, 
 
 lar. Plural. 
 
 le pere, the father ; les peres, the fathers. 
 
 du pere, of the father ; du peres, of the fathers. 
 
 au pere, to the father ; aux peres, to the fathers. 
 
 (2.) Before a Feminine Noun. 
 
 la mere, the mother ; les meres, the mothers. 
 
 de la mere, of the mother ; des meres, of the mothers. 
 
 a la mere, to the mother ; aux meres, to the mothers. 
 
 (3.) Before a Vowel. 
 l'enfant, the child ; les enfants, the children. 
 
 de l'enfant, of the child ; des enfants, of the children, 
 
 a l'enfant, to the child ; aux enfants, to the children. 
 
 (4.) Partitive Tense. 
 
 du pain, bread ; de la viande, meat, 
 
 de bon pain, good bread ; de bonne viande, good meat. 
 
 pas de pain, no bread ; pas de viande, no meat. 
 
 des gateaux, cakes ; de l'eau, water. 
 
 de bons gateaux, good cakes ; pas d'eau, no water. 
 
 III. The Adjective, 
 
 1. QUALIFYING ADJECTIVES. 
 
 (1.) Gender. — Singular. 
 
 Masculine. Feminine. 
 
 un petit garcon, a little boy ; une petite fille, a little girl, 
 
 un grand jardin, a large garden ; une grande maison, a large house. 
 de mauvais papier, bad paper ; de mauvaise encre, bad ink. 
 
150 
 
 THE ADJECTIVE. 
 
 Masculine. Feminine. 
 
 un jeune homme, a young man ; une jeune femme, a young woman 
 un enfant malade, a sick child ; une fille malade, a sick girl. 
 
 de bon pain, good bread ; 
 un tel homme, such, a man ; 
 
 de bonne viande, good meat. 
 une telle femme, suck a woman. 
 
 un garcon attentif, an attentive une fille attentive, an attentive 
 
 boy ; girl, 
 
 un chapeau neuf, a new hat ; une robe neuve, a new dress. 
 
 un pere courageux, a courageous une mere courageuse, a courage- 
 father ; ous woman. 
 
 un frere studieux, a studious une sceur studieuse, a studious sis- 
 brother : ter. 
 
 un beau jour, a fine day ; 
 
 un bel arbre, a fine tree ; 
 
 un nouveau cheval, a new horse; 
 
 un nouvel eleve, a new scholar ; 
 
 un vieux soldat, an old soldier ; 
 
 un vieil homme, an old man ; 
 
 une belle maison, a handsome 
 house. 
 
 une nouvelle voiture, a new car- 
 riage. 
 
 une vieille femme, an old wo- 
 man. 
 
 (2.) 
 
 Plural. 
 
 les petits garcons, the little boys ; les petites filles, the little girls, 
 les mauvais crayons, the bad pen- les mauvaises plumes, the bad 
 
 cils ; pens. 
 
 les garcons attentifs, the attentive les filles attentives, the attentive 
 
 boys ; girls. 
 
 les hommes heureux, the happy les femmes heureuses, the happy 
 
 men ; Avomen. 
 
 les beaux arbres, the fine trees : les belles maisons, the fine houses. 
 les nouveaux dessins, the new pat- les nouvelles etoffes, the new 
 
 terns ; goods. 
 
LIMITING ADJECTIVES.— NUMERALS. 
 
 151 
 
 (1.) 
 
 2. LIMITING ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Possessive Adjectives. 
 
 Singular. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 
 Masculine. 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 For loth. 
 
 
 mon, 
 
 ma, 
 
 mes, 
 
 my. 
 
 ton, 
 
 ta, 
 
 tes, 
 
 thy. 
 
 son, 
 
 sa, 
 
 ses, 
 
 his, her. 
 
 notre, 
 
 notre, 
 
 nos, 
 
 our. 
 
 votre, 
 
 votre, 
 
 vos, 
 
 your. 
 
 leur, 
 
 leur, 
 
 leurs, 
 
 their. 
 
 its. 
 
 (2.) Demonstrative Adjective. 
 
 Singular. Plural. 
 
 Masculine. Feminine. For ooth. 
 
 ce, cet, cette, this, that, ces, these, those. 
 
 ce garcon, this boy, that boy ; 
 ce garcon-ci, this boy ; 
 ce garcon-la, that boy ; 
 
 ces gargons, these boys, those boy{ 
 ces garcons-ci, these boys. 
 ces gargons-la, those boys. 
 
 (3.) 
 
 Cardinal. 
 
 1. Un,/m. une. 
 
 2. Deux. 
 
 3. Trois. 
 
 4. Quatre. 
 
 5. Cinq. 
 
 6. Six. 
 
 7. Sept. 
 
 8. Huit. 
 
 9. Neuf. 
 
 10. Dix. 
 
 11. Onze. 
 
 12. Douze. 
 
 13. Treize. 
 
 14. Quatorze. 
 15c Quinze. 
 
 Numeral Adjectives. 
 
 Ordinal. 
 
 1st. Premier, fern, premiere. 
 
 2d. Deuxieme, or Second-e. 
 
 3d. Troisieme. 
 
 4th. Quatrieme. 
 
 5th. Cinquieme. 
 
 6th. Sixieme. 
 
 7th. Septieme. 
 
 8th. Huitieme. 
 
 9th. Neuvieme. 
 10th. Dixieme. 
 11th. Onzieme. 
 12th. Douzieme. 
 13th. Treizieme. 
 14th. Quatorzieme. 
 15th. Quinzieme. 
 
15 
 
 2 
 
 NUMERALS. 
 
 16. 
 
 Seize. 
 
 16th. 
 
 Seizieme. 
 
 17. 
 
 Dix-sept. 
 
 17th. 
 
 Dix-septieme. 
 
 18. 
 
 Dix-huit. 
 
 18th. 
 
 Dix-huitieme. 
 
 19. 
 
 Dix-neuf. 
 
 19th. 
 
 Dix-neuvieme. 
 
 20. 
 
 Vingt. 
 
 20th. 
 
 Vingtieme. 
 
 21. 
 
 Vingt et un. 
 
 21st. 
 
 Vingt et unieme. 
 
 22. 
 
 Vingt-deux. 
 
 22d. 
 
 Vingt-deuxieme. 
 
 23. 
 
 Vingt-trois. 
 
 23d. 
 
 Vingt-troisieme. 
 
 24. 
 
 Vingt-quatre. 
 
 24th. 
 
 Vingt-quatrieme. 
 
 25. 
 
 Vingt-cinq. 
 
 25th. 
 
 Vingt-cinquieme. 
 
 26. 
 
 Vingt-six. 
 
 26th. 
 
 Vingt-sixieme. 
 
 27. 
 
 Vingt-sept. 
 
 27th. 
 
 Vingt-septieme. 
 
 28. 
 
 Vingt-huit. 
 
 28th. 
 
 Vingt-huitieme. 
 
 29. 
 
 Vingt-neuf. 
 
 29th. 
 
 Vingt-neuvieme. 
 
 30. 
 
 Trente. 
 
 30th. 
 
 Trentieme. 
 
 31. 
 
 Trente et un. 
 
 ' 31st. 
 
 Trente et unieme. 
 
 32. 
 
 Trente-deux. 
 
 32d. 
 
 Trente-d euxieme. 
 
 33. 
 
 Trente-trois. 
 
 33d. 
 
 Trente- troisieme. 
 
 40. 
 
 Quarante. 
 
 40th. 
 
 Quarantieme. 
 
 41. 
 
 Quarante et un. 
 
 41st. 
 
 Quarante et unieme. 
 
 42. 
 
 Quarante-deux. 
 
 42d. 
 
 Quarante- deuxieme. 
 
 43. 
 
 Quarante-trois. 
 
 43d. 
 
 Quarante-troisieme. 
 
 50. 
 
 Cinquante. 
 
 .50th. 
 
 Oinquantieme. 
 
 51. 
 
 Cinquante et un. 
 
 51st. 
 
 Cinquante et unieme. 
 
 52. 
 
 Cinquante-deux. 
 
 52d. 
 
 Cinquante- deuxieme. 
 
 53. 
 
 Cinquante-trois. 
 
 53d. 
 
 Cinquante- troisieme. 
 
 60. 
 
 Soixante. 
 
 60th. 
 
 Soixantieme. 
 
 61. 
 
 Soixante et un. 
 
 61st. 
 
 Soixante et unieme. 
 
 62. 
 
 S oixante-deux. 
 
 62d. 
 
 Soixante-d euxieme. 
 
 63. 
 
 Soixante-trois. 
 
 63d. 
 
 Soixante-troisieme. 
 
 70. 
 
 Soixante-dix. 
 
 70th. 
 
 Soixante dixieme. 
 
 71. 
 
 Soixante et onze. 
 
 71st. 
 
 Soixante-onzieme. 
 
 72. 
 
 Soixante- douz e. 
 
 72d. 
 
 Soixante - douzieme. 
 
 73. 
 
 Soixante-treize. 
 
 73d. 
 
 Soixante-treizieme. 
 
 74. 
 
 Soixante-quatorze. 
 
 74th. 
 
 Soixante-quatorzieme. 
 
 75. 
 
 Soixante-quinze. 
 
 75th. 
 
 Soixante-quinzieme. 
 
 76. 
 
 Soixante-seize. 
 
 76th. 
 
 Soixante-seizieme. 
 
 77. 
 
 Soixante-dix-sept. 
 
 77th. 
 
 Soixante-dix-septieme. 
 
 78. 
 
 Soixante-dix-huit. 
 
 78th. 
 
 Soixante-dix-huitieme. 
 
 79. 
 
 Soixante-dix-neuf. 
 
 79th. 
 
 Soixante-dix neuvieme. 
 
 80. 
 
 Quatre-vingts. 
 
 80th. 
 
 Quatre- vingtieme. 
 
NUMERALS.— INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 153 
 
 81. Quatre- vingt-un. 81st. 
 
 82. Quatre- vingt- deux. 82d. 
 
 83. Quatre-vingt-trois. 83d. 
 
 84. Quatre-vingt-quatre. 84th. 
 
 85. Quatre-vingt-cinq. 85tli. 
 
 86. Quati'e-vingt-six. 86th. 
 
 87. Quatre-vingt-sept. 87th. 
 
 88. Quatre-vingt-huit. 88th. 
 
 89. Quatre-vingt-neuf. 89th. 
 
 90. Quatre-vingt-dix. 90th. 
 
 91. Quatre-vingt-onze. 91st. 
 
 92. Quatre- vingt- douze. 92d. 
 
 93. Quatre-vingt -treize. 93d. 
 
 94. Quatre-vingt-quatorze. 94th. 
 
 Quatre-vingt unieme. 
 Quatre-vingt- deuxieme. 
 Quatre- vingt-troisieme. 
 Quatre-vingt- quatrieme. 
 Quatre-vingt-cinquieme. 
 Quatre-vingt- sixieme. 
 Quatre-vingt septie me. 
 Quartre- vingt huitieme. 
 Quartre- vingt-neuvi' rr.e. 
 Quatre- vingt- dixie me. 
 Quatre-vingt onzieme. 
 Quatre-vingt-douzieme. 
 Quatre-vingt-treizieme. 
 Quatre - vingt - quator- 
 
 95. Quatre-vingt-quinze. 95th. 
 
 96. Quatre-vingt seize. 96th. 
 
 97. Quatre vingt-dix-sept. 97th. 
 
 98. Quatre-vingt-dix-huit. 98th. 
 
 99. Quatre-vingt-dix-neuf. 99th. 
 
 100. Cent. 100th. 
 
 101. Cent-un. 101st. 
 200. Deux cents. 200th. 
 210. Deux cent-dix 210th. 
 
 1.000. Mille. 1,000th. 
 
 1.001. Mille-un. 1,001st. 
 2,000. Deux mille. 2,000th. 
 2,500. Deux mille-cinq cents. 2,500th. 
 3,000. Trois mille. 3,000th. 
 
 1,000,000. Un million. 1,000,000th. 
 
 Quatre-vingt-quinzieme. 
 
 Quatre- vingt-seizieme. 
 
 Quatre - vingt - dix - sep- 
 tieme. 
 
 Quatre - vingt - dix - hui- 
 tieme. 
 
 Quatre - vingt - dix - neu- 
 
 Oentieme. [vieme. 
 
 Cent-unieme. 
 
 Deux centieme. 
 
 Deux cent-dixieme. 
 
 Millieme. 
 
 Mille-unieme. 
 
 Deux millieme. 
 
 Deux mille - cinq - cen- 
 
 Trois millieme. [tiemeo 
 
 Millionieme. 
 
 (4) 
 
 Indefinite Adjectives. 
 
 Aucun, aucune, no, not any 
 
 Nul, nulle, no ; 
 
 Pas un, pas une, not one ; 
 
 Autre, other ; 
 
 Meme, same ; 
 
 Chaque, each ; 
 
 6* 
 
 Tout, toute, all ; every ; whole. 
 Plusieurs, several. 
 Quel, quelle, what ; which. 
 Quelque, some ; quelques, a few. 
 Quelconque, any ; whatever. 
 Tel, telle, such. 
 
154 THE PRONOUN. 
 
 IV. The Pronoun. 
 
 1. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. — CONJUNCTIVE. 
 
 (1.) Singular. 
 
 je (j'), I ; me (m') } me ; me (m'), to me. 
 
 tu, thou ; te (f), thee ; te (f), to thee. 
 
 il, he, it ; le (1'), him, it ; lui, to him. 
 
 elle, she, it ; la (1'), her, it ; lui, to her. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 nous, we ; 
 
 
 nous, 
 
 us ; 
 
 
 nous, 
 
 to us. 
 
 vouSj you ; 
 
 
 vous, 
 
 you ; 
 
 
 vous, 
 
 to you. 
 
 ils, they ; 
 
 
 les, 
 
 them ; 
 
 
 leur, 
 
 to them 
 
 elles, they ; 
 
 
 les, 
 
 them ; 
 
 
 leur, 
 
 to them 
 
 en, some or any 
 
 of it, 
 
 of them ; 
 
 y, to it, 
 
 to them 
 
 le 
 
 (1'), it, so 
 
 (2.) Personal Pronouns used as Reflective Pronouns. 
 
 me, myself, to myself ; nous, ourselves, to ourselves. 
 
 te, thyself, to thyself ; vous, yourselves, to yourselves. 
 
 se, himself, herself, itself, themselves, one's self. 
 
 
 (3.) 
 
 Personal Pronouns- 
 
 -Disjunctive. 
 
 moi, 
 
 I, or me ; 
 
 nous, 
 
 we, or us. 
 
 toi, 
 
 thou, or thee 
 
 ; vous, 
 
 you. 
 
 lui, 
 
 he, or him ; 
 
 eux, 
 
 they, or them. 
 
 elle, 
 
 she, or her ; 
 
 elles, 
 
 they, or them. 
 
 soi, himself, herself, itself, themselves, one's self. 
 
 (4.) Compound Personal Pronouns. 
 
 moi-meme, myself; nous-m&mes, ourselves. 
 
 toi-meme, thyself ; vous-memes, yourselves. 
 
 vous-m&me, yourself ; eux-memes, themselves. 
 
 lui-mSme, himself ; elles-memes, themselves. 
 
 elle-meme, herself ; soi-meme, one's self. 
 
THE PRONOUN. 
 
 155 
 
 Singular. 
 
 2. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Masculine 
 
 . Feminine. Masculine. 
 
 Feminine. 
 
 
 le mien, 
 
 la mienne, les miens, 
 
 les miennes, 
 
 mine. 
 
 le tien, 
 
 la tienne, les tiens, 
 
 les tiennes, 
 
 thine. 
 
 le sien, 
 
 la sienne, les siens, 
 
 les siennes, 
 
 his ; hers. 
 
 le notre, 
 
 la notre, les notres, 
 
 les notres, 
 
 ours. 
 
 le votre, 
 
 la votre, les votres, 
 
 les votres, 
 
 yours. 
 
 le leur, 
 
 la leur, les leurs, 
 
 les leurs, 
 
 theirs. 
 
 
 3. DEMONSTRATIVE 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 
 
 ce, that, it ; ceci, this 
 
 ; cela, that. 
 
 Masculine. Feminine. 
 celui, celle, that, the one. 
 
 celui-ci, celle-ci, this one. 
 celui-la, celle-la, that one. 
 
 Plural. 
 
 Masculine. Feminine. 
 
 ceux, celles, those, 
 
 ceux-ci, celles-ci, these. 
 
 ceux-la, celles-la, those. 
 
 4. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 qui ? who ? whom ? 
 
 que ? what ? 
 
 quoi ? what ? 
 
 lequel ? laquelle ? which ? which one ? 
 
 lesquels ? lesquelles ? which ? which ones ? 
 
 qui est-ce qui ? who ? 
 qu'est-ce qui ? what? 
 qui est-ce que ? whom ? 
 qu'est-ce que ? what ? 
 
 5. RELATIVE PRONOUNS, 
 qui, who, which, that. 
 que, whom, which, that, 
 a qui, to whom. 
 
 lequel, laquelle, lesquels, lesquelles, who, whom, which, 
 dont, of whom, of which, whose. 
 quoi, what, 
 ou, in which. 
 
156 
 
 TEE VERB— AVOIR. 
 
 6. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 autrui, others ; 
 chacun, every one ; 
 
 l'un et 1' autre, both ; 
 l'un ou l'autre, either ; 
 ni l'un ni l'autre, neither ; 
 
 on, one, some one, people, they. 
 personne (ne), nobody. 
 quelqu'un, somebody. 
 quelques-uns, some, a few. 
 quiconqus, whoever, 
 un de, one of. 
 
 aucun (ne), 
 
 nul (ne), 
 
 pas un (ne), not one ; 
 
 plusieurs, several. 
 
 tel, telle, such. 
 
 tout, all ; everything. 
 
 V. The Verb. 
 
 Conjugation op Avoir— to have. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Avoir, 
 
 INFINITIVE MODE. 
 
 to have. 
 
 Past. 
 Avoir eu, to have had. 
 
 Present. 
 Ayant, having. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 Past. 
 Eu, m. ; eue,/., had. 
 
 Compound. 
 Ayant eu, having had. 
 
 INDICATIVE MODE. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 
 Past Indefinite. 
 
 J'ai, 
 
 
 I have. 
 
 J'ai eu, 
 
 I have had. 
 
 Tuas, 
 
 
 thou hast. 
 
 Tu as eu, 
 
 thou lia-it had. 
 
 11 a, 
 
 
 he has. 
 
 11 a eu. 
 
 he has had. 
 
 Nous avons, 
 
 
 we have. 
 
 Nous avons eu, 
 
 we have had. 
 
 Vous avez, 
 
 
 you have. 
 
 Vous avez eu, 
 
 you have had. 
 
 Us ont, 
 
 
 they have. 
 
 lis out eu, 
 
 they have had. 
 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 J'avais, 
 
 
 I had. 
 
 J' avais eu, 
 
 I had had. 
 
 Tu avais, 
 
 
 thou hadxt. 
 
 Tu avais en. 
 
 thou had$t had. 
 
 11 avail, 
 
 
 he had. 
 
 11 avair en. 
 
 he had had. 
 
 Nous avions, 
 
 
 we had. 
 
 Nous avions eu, 
 
 we had had. 
 
 Vous aviez, 
 
 
 you had. 
 
 Vous aviez en, 
 
 you had had. 
 
 lis avaient, 
 
 
 they had. 
 
 Jls avaient eu, 
 
 thty had had. 
 
t 
 
 THE VERB— AVOIR. 
 
 157 
 
 
 Past Definite. 
 
 Past Anterior. 
 
 J'eus, 
 
 1 had. 
 
 J'eus eu. 
 
 / had had. 
 
 Tu eus, 
 
 thou hadst. 
 
 Tu eus eu, 
 
 thou hadst had. 
 
 11 eut, 
 
 he had. 
 
 11 eut eu, 
 
 he had had. 
 
 Nous eumes, 
 
 we had. 
 
 Nous eumes eu, 
 
 we had had. 
 
 Vous eutes, 
 
 you had. 
 
 Vous eutes eu, 
 
 you had had. 
 
 lis eureut, 
 
 they had. 
 
 lis eureut eu, 
 
 they had had. 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 Future Anterior. 
 
 J'aurai, 
 
 1 shall have. 
 
 J'aurai eu, 
 
 I shall have had. 
 
 Tu auras, 
 
 thou wilt have. 
 
 Tu auras eu, 
 
 thou wilt have had. 
 
 11 aura, 
 
 he will have. 
 
 11 aura eu, 
 
 he will have had. 
 
 Nous aurons 
 
 , we shall have. 
 
 Nous aurons eu, 
 
 we shall have had. 
 
 Vous aurez, 
 
 ■ you will have. 
 
 Vous aurez eu, 
 
 you will have had. 
 
 lis auront. 
 
 they will have. 
 
 lis auront eu, 
 
 they will have had. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MODE. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past. 
 
 J'aurais,- 
 
 Ishoidd have. 
 
 J'aurais eu, I should have had. 
 
 Tu aurais, 
 
 thou wouldst have. 
 
 Tu aurais eu, thou wouldst have had. 
 
 11 aurait, 
 
 he would have. 
 
 11 aurait eu, he would have had. 
 
 Nousaurions, 
 
 we should have. 
 
 Nous aurions eu, we should have had. 
 
 Vous auriez, 
 
 you woul'l have. 
 
 Vous auriez eu, you would have had. 
 
 lis auraient, 
 
 they would have. 
 
 lis auraient eu, they would have had. 
 
 
 IMPERATIVE MODE. 
 
 
 
 Ayons, let us have. 
 
 Aie, 
 
 have {thou) . 
 
 Ayez, have (you). 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Que j'aie, 
 
 that I may have. 
 
 Qu e j 'aie eu , that I may 1 
 
 Que tu aies, 
 
 that thou rnayst have. 
 
 Que tu aies eu, that tlwu mayst 1 > 
 
 Qu'il ait, 
 
 that he may have. 
 
 Qu'il ait eu, that he may > § 
 Que nous ayons eu, that we may • >* 
 
 Que nous ayom 
 
 5, that we may have. 
 
 Que vous ayez, 
 
 that you may have. 
 
 Que vous ayez eu, that you may | ?- 
 
 Qu'ils aient, 
 
 that they may have. 
 
 Qu'ils aient eu, that they may J 
 
 ; 
 
 [mperpect. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Que j'eusse, 
 
 that I) 
 that thou J. 
 
 Que j'eusse eu, that I'} 
 
 Que tu eusses, 
 
 Que tu eusses eu, that thou 1 § 
 
 Qu'il eut, 
 
 that he » 
 
 Qu'il eut eu, that he • >1. 
 Que nous eussions eu, that we • a> 
 
 Que nous eussions, that v)e f g 4 
 
 Que vous enesiez, that you \ ^ 
 
 Que vous eussiez eu, that you | « 
 
 Qu'ils eussent, 
 
 that they J 
 
 Qu"ils eussent eu, that they J 
 
158 
 
 THE VERB—ETRE 
 
 fiti 
 
 Present 
 
 Conjugation of JEtre — to he. 
 INFINITIVE MODE. 
 to be. 
 
 Past. 
 Avoir ete, to have been. 
 
 Present. . 
 
 Etant, being. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 ^ Past. 
 Ete, been. 
 
 Compound. 
 Ayant ete, having been. 
 
 Present. 
 
 INDICATIVE MODE. 
 
 Past Indefinite. 
 
 Je euis, 
 
 lam 
 
 J'ai ete, 
 
 7 hare been. 
 
 Tu es, 
 
 thou art. 
 
 Tu as ete, 
 
 thou hast been. 
 
 11 est, 
 
 he is. 
 
 11 a ete, 
 
 he has been. 
 
 Nous sommes, 
 
 we are 
 
 Nous avons ete, 
 
 we have been. 
 
 Vous etes, 
 
 you are. 
 
 Vous avez ete, 
 
 you have been. 
 
 lis sout, 
 
 they are. 
 
 lis ont ete, 
 
 they have been. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 J'etais, 
 
 I was. 
 
 J'avais 6te, 
 
 1 had been. 
 
 Tuetais, 
 
 thou wast. 
 
 Tu avnis ete, 
 
 thou hadst been. 
 
 11 etait, 
 
 he was. 
 
 11 avait ete, 
 
 he had been. 
 
 Nous etions, 
 
 we were. 
 
 Nous avions ete, 
 
 we had been. 
 
 Vous etiez, 
 
 you were. 
 
 Vous aviez ete, 
 
 you had been. 
 
 lis etaient, 
 
 they were. 
 
 lis avaient ete, 
 
 they had been. 
 
 Past Definite. 
 
 Past Anterior. 
 
 Je fus, 
 
 I was. 
 
 J'ens ete, 
 
 I had been. 
 
 Tu fus, 
 
 thou wast. 
 
 Tu eus ete, 
 
 thou hadst been. 
 
 11 fut, 
 
 he teas. 
 
 11 eut ete, 
 
 he had been. 
 
 Nous fumes, 
 
 we were. 
 
 Nous eumes ete, 
 
 we had been. 
 
 Vous fiites, 
 
 you were. 
 
 Vous eiites ete, 
 
 yo'u had been. 
 
 lis furent, 
 
 they were. 
 
 lis eurent ete, 
 
 they had been. 
 
 future. 
 
 
 Future Anterior. 
 
 Je serai, 
 
 I shall be. 
 
 J'aurai ete, 
 
 I shall have been. 
 
 Tu seras, 
 
 thou wilt be. 
 
 Tu auras ete, 
 
 thou will have been. 
 
 11 sera, 
 
 he will be. 
 
 11 aura ete, 
 
 he will have been. 
 
 Nous serons, 
 
 we shall be. 
 
 Nous aurons ete, 
 
 we shall have been. 
 
 Vous serez, 
 
 you will be. 
 
 Vous aurez ete, 
 
 you will have been. 
 
 lis serout, 
 
 they will be. 
 
 lis auront ete, 
 
 they will have been. 
 
 CONDITIONAL MODE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Je serais, I should be. 
 
 Tu serais, thou wouldst be. 
 
 11 serait, he would be. 
 
 Nous serions, v)e should be. 
 
 Vous seriez, you would be. 
 
 lis seraient, they ivould be. 
 
 Past. 
 J'aurais ete, 1 should have been. 
 
 Tu aurais ete, thou wouldst have been. 
 II aurait ete, he would have been. 
 
 Nous aurions ete, wc should have been. 
 Vous auriez ete, ijou icould have been. 
 Ilsauraient ete, they would hare been. 
 
THE VERB—PARLER. 
 
 159 
 
 Sois, 
 
 IMPERATIVE MODE. 
 
 Soyons, 
 be (thou). Soyez, 
 
 let us be. 
 be {you). 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. 
 
 Que je sois, 
 Que tu sois, 
 Qu'il so it, 
 Que nous soy.ms, 
 Que vous soyez, 
 Qu'ils soient, 
 
 Present. 
 
 that I may be. 
 
 that thou may si be. 
 
 that he may be. 
 
 that we may be. 
 
 that you may be. 
 
 that they may be. 
 
 Impekfect. 
 
 Que je fusse, 
 Que tu fusses, 
 Qu'il rut, 
 Que nousfussions, 
 Que vous f ussiez, 
 Qu'ils i'usseut, 
 
 that 71 
 
 that thou I | 
 
 that he\^ 
 
 that we j ** 
 
 that you ^ 
 
 that they J 
 
 Past. 
 Que j'aie ete, that I may) 
 
 Que tu aies ete, that thou mays t'\ ^ 
 Qu'il ait ete, that he may • § 
 
 Que nous ayous ete, that we may • % 
 Que vous ayez ete, that you may ? 
 Qu'ils aieiit ete, that they may} 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 Que j'eusse ete, 
 Que tu eusses ete, 
 Qu'il eut ete, 
 Que nous eussions ete, 
 Que vous eussiez ete, 
 Qu'ils eussent ete, 
 
 that 
 that thou 
 that he 
 that we • § > 
 that you | ' | 
 that they J 
 
 i\ i. 
 
 .e - <&->■ 
 
 Conjugation of Parler — to speak. 
 INFINITIVE MODE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Parler, to speak. 
 
 Past. 
 Avoir parle, to have spoken. 
 
 Present. 
 Parlant, speaking. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 Past. 
 
 Parle, spoken. 
 
 Compound. 
 Ayant parle, having spoke?i. 
 
 INDICATIVE MODE. 
 
 Je parle, 
 Tu paries, 
 II parle, 
 Nous? parlons, 
 Vous parlez, 
 lis parlent, 
 
 Present. 
 
 I speak. 
 
 thou speakest. 
 
 he speaks. 
 
 we speak. 
 
 you speak. 
 
 they speak. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Je parlais, 
 Tu parlais, 
 II parlait, 
 Nous pnrlions, 
 Vous parliez, 
 lis parlaient, 
 
 I was speaking. 
 
 thou wast speaking. 
 
 he was speaking. 
 
 we were speaking. 
 
 you were speaking. 
 
 they were speaking. 
 
 Past Indefinite. 
 
 J'ai parle, 
 Tu as parle, 
 11 a parle, 
 Nous avons parle, 
 Vous avez parle, 
 lis ont parle, 
 
 1 have spoken. 
 
 thou hast spoken. 
 
 he has spoken. 
 
 we have spoken. 
 
 you have spoken. 
 
 they have spoken. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 J'avais parle, 
 Tu avais parle, 
 II avait parle, 
 Nous avion? parle, 
 Vous aviez parle, 
 lis avaient parle, 
 
 I had spoken. 
 
 thou hadst spoken. 
 
 he had spoken. 
 
 we had spoken . 
 
 you had spoken. 
 
 they had spoken. 
 
ICO 
 
 THE VERB—PARLER. 
 
 Past Definite. 
 
 Past Anterior. 
 
 Je parlai, 
 Tu parlas, 
 II parla. 
 Nous parlames, 
 Vous parlates, 
 lis parlerent, 
 
 I spoke. 
 
 thou spokest. 
 
 he spoke. 
 
 we spoke. 
 
 they spoke. 
 
 J*eus parle, 
 Tu eus parle, 
 II eut parle, 
 Nous eurnes parle, 
 Vous eutes parle, 
 lis eurent parle, 
 
 1 had spoken. 
 
 thou hadst spoken. 
 
 he had spoken. 
 
 we had spoken. 
 
 you had spoken. 
 
 they had spoken. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Future Anterior. 
 
 Je parlerai, 
 Tu parleras, 
 II parlera, 
 Nous parlerons, 
 Vous parlerez, 
 lis parleront, 
 
 I shall speak, 
 thou wilt speak. 
 
 he will speak. 
 
 we shall speak. 
 
 you will speak, 
 they will speak. 
 
 J'aurai parle, 
 Tu auras parle, 
 II aura parle, 
 Nous aurons parle, 
 Vous aurez parle, 
 lis auront parle, 
 
 Is7iaW\ g, 
 
 thou wilt I § 
 
 he will > 
 
 toe shall - "f 
 
 you will | I* 
 
 they will) • 
 
 CONDITIONAL MODE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Je parlerais, 
 Tu parlerais, 
 II parlerait, 
 Nous parlerions, 
 Vous parleriez, 
 lis parleraient, 
 
 I should speak. 
 
 thou wouldst speak. 
 
 he would speak. 
 
 we should s])eak. 
 
 you would speak. 
 
 they would speak. 
 
 Past. 
 J'aurais parle, 
 Tu aurais parle, 
 II aurait parle, 
 Nous aurions parle, 
 Vous auriez parle, 
 lis auraient parle, 
 
 I should] ^ 
 
 thou wouldst ! | 
 
 he would ■ 
 
 we should ■" § 
 
 you would I 5 
 
 they would) • 
 
 IMPERATIVE MODE. 
 
 Parle, 
 
 Parlous, 
 speak (thou). Parlez, 
 
 let us speak, 
 speak (you). 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. 
 
 Present. 
 Que je parle, that I may speak. 
 
 Que tu paries, that thou mayst speak. 
 Qu'il parle, that he may speak. 
 
 Que nous parlions. that we may speak. 
 Que vons parliez, that you may speak. 
 Qu'ils parlent, that they may speak. 
 
 Past 
 Que j'aie parle. 
 Que tu aies parle, 
 Qu'il ait parle, 
 
 that Imay'] ^ 
 
 that thou mayst I § 
 
 that he may ■ * 
 
 r *§ 
 
 Que nous ayons parle. that we may • § 
 Que vous ayez parle, that you may $* 
 Qu'ils aient parle, that they may) ' 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Que je parlasse, 
 Que tu parlasses, 
 Qu'il parlat, 
 Que nous parlassiom 
 Que vous parlassiez, 
 Qu'ils parlassent, 
 
 that 7i 
 
 that thou I <^- 
 that he \ ft 
 
 h 
 
 thai you I § 
 that they) t* 
 
 that we 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 Que j'eusse parle, that 1~\ 
 
 Que tu eusses parle, that thou I E 
 Qu'il eut parle, that he • © > 
 
 Que nous eussions parle, that we < | > 
 Que vous eussiez parle, that you j ' 5 
 Qu'ils cussent parle, that they) 
 
THE VERB— FINIR. 
 
 '1C1 
 
 Conjugation of Finir — to finish. 
 INFINITIVE MODE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Finir, tofinish. 
 
 Past. 
 Avoir fini, to have finished. 
 
 Present. 
 Finisi-ant, finishing. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 Past. 
 
 Fim, finished. 
 
 Compound. 
 Ayant fini, having finished 
 
 INDICATIVE MODE. 
 
 Je finis, 
 
 Tu finis, 
 
 II finit, 
 
 Nous finissons, 
 
 Vous finissez, 
 
 lis finisscnt, 
 
 Je finissais, 
 Tu finissais, 
 II finiseait, 
 Nous Amissions 
 Vous finissioz, 
 lis fiuissaient, 
 
 I finish. 
 
 thou finishest. 
 
 hefinishes. 
 
 we finish. 
 
 you finish. 
 
 they finish. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 / was finishing. 
 
 thou wast finishing. 
 
 he was finishing. 
 
 we were finishing. 
 
 you were finishing. 
 
 they were finishing. 
 
 Past Definite. 
 
 Je finis, 
 Tu finis, 
 II finit, 
 Nous finimes, 
 Vous finiles, 
 lis finirent, 
 
 Je finirai, 
 Tu finiras, 
 n finira, 
 Nous finirons, 
 Nous finirez, 
 Us finiront, 
 
 I finished. 
 
 Future. 
 
 he finished. 
 
 we finished, 
 you finished, 
 they finished. 
 
 I shall finish, 
 thou wilt finish. 
 he will finish, 
 we shall finish, 
 you will finish, 
 they will finish. 
 
 Past Indefinite. 
 
 J'ai fini, 
 Tu as fini, 
 II a fini, 
 
 Nous avons fini, 
 Vous avez fini, 
 Us out fini, 
 
 / have finished, 
 thou hast finished. 
 
 he has finished. 
 
 we have finished. 
 
 you have finished. 
 
 they have finished. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 J'avais fini, 
 Tu avais fini, 
 II avait fini, 
 Nous avion s fini, 
 Vous aviez fini, 
 Us avaient fini, 
 
 1 had finished. 
 
 thou hadst finished. 
 
 he had finished. 
 
 we had finished. 
 
 you had finished. 
 
 they had finished^ 
 
 Past Anterior. 
 J'eus fini, I had finished. 
 
 Tu eus fini, 
 U eut fini, 
 Nous eumes fini, 
 Vous eutes fini, 
 Us eurent fini, 
 
 thou hadst finished. 
 
 he had finished. 
 
 we had finished. 
 
 you had finished. 
 
 they had fini 
 
 Future Anterior. 
 
 J'aurai fini, 
 Tu auras fini, 
 II aura fini, 
 Nous aurons fini, 
 Vous aurez fini, 
 Us auront fini, 
 
 I shall} 
 thou wilt | "jt, 
 he wiS [ §.§■ 
 
 we shall • f"£ 
 you will | • 
 they will) 
 
 CONDITIONAL MODE. 
 
 Je finirais, 
 Tu finirais, 
 II finirait, 
 Nous finirions, 
 Vous finiriez, 
 lis finiraient, 
 
 Present. 
 
 I should finish. 
 
 thou wouldst finish. 
 
 he would finish. 
 
 we should finish. 
 
 you would finish. 
 
 they would finish. 
 
 Past. 
 
 J'aurais fini, 
 Tu aurais fini, 
 II aurait fini, 
 Nous aurions fini, 
 Vous auriez fini, 
 Us auraient fini, 
 
 I should } 
 thou wouldst I ^ 
 he would i g'1* 
 we should • f"» 
 you would | 
 they would) 
 
162 
 
 TEE VERB— RECE VOIR. 
 
 IMPERATIVE MODE. 
 
 
 Finnissons, let us finish. 
 
 Finis, finish (thou). 
 
 Finissez, finish {you). 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Que je finisse, that Imay') 
 
 Que j'aie fini, that I may'] a* 
 
 Que tu finisses, that thou mayst 1 
 
 Que tu aies fini, that thou mayst j § 
 
 Qu'il finisse, that he may ■ ^ 
 Que nous finissions, that we may > % 
 
 Qu'il ait fini, that he may • -^ 
 Que nous ayons fini, that we may [" s. 
 
 Que vons fiuissiez, that you may 
 
 Que vous ayez fini, that you may ^ 
 
 Qu'il finissent, that they may) 
 
 Qu'ils aient fini, that they may) ■ 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Que je finisse, that I~) 
 Que tu finieses, that thou 1 *>• 
 
 Que j'eusse fini, that 71 
 
 Que tu eusses fini, that thou <gjt, 
 
 Qu'il finit, that he 1 * 
 Que nous finissions, that we > gj> 
 
 Qu'il eut fini, that he !?§■ 
 Que nous eussions fini, that, roe < §*> 
 
 Que vous finissiez, that you g 
 
 Que vous eussiez fini, that you ^§ 
 
 Qu'ils finissent, that they J ' 
 
 Qu'ils eussent fini, that they 1 
 
 Conjugation of Recevoir — to receive. 
 
 INFINITIVE MODE. 
 Present. Past. 
 
 Recevoir, to receive. Avoir recu, to have received. 
 
 Present. 
 Recevant, receiving, 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Past. Compound. 
 
 Recu, received. Ayant recu, having received. 
 
 INDICATIVE MODE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Je recois, 
 Tu recois. 
 II reeoit. 
 Nous recevons, 
 Vous recevez, 
 lis recoivent, 
 
 I receive. 
 
 thou receivest. 
 
 he receives. 
 
 we receive. 
 
 you receive. 
 
 they receive. 
 
 Je recevais, 
 Tu recevais, 
 II recevait, 
 Nous rccevions 
 Vous receviez, 
 He recevaient, 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 I was receiving. 
 
 thou wast receiving. 
 
 he was receiving. 
 
 we were receiving. 
 
 you were receiving. 
 
 they were receiving. 
 
 Past Indefinite. 
 
 J'ai recu, 
 Tu as recu, 
 ll a re9U. 
 Nous avons recu, 
 Vous avez recu, 
 lis ont recu, 
 
 1 have received. 
 
 thou hast received. 
 
 he has received. 
 
 we have received. 
 
 you have received. 
 
 they have received. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 J'avais recu. 
 Tu avais recu, 
 II avait recu, 
 Nous avions recu. 
 Vous aviez recu, 
 Us avaient re^u, 
 
 I had received. 
 
 thou hadst received. 
 
 he had received. 
 
 we had received. 
 
 you had received. 
 
 they had received. 
 
THE VERB—RECEV01R. 
 
 163 
 
 Past Definite. 
 
 Je re^us, 
 Tu re9iis, 
 II reyut, 
 Nous recumes, 
 Vous re9 fixes, 
 lis re9urcnt, 
 
 I received. 
 
 thou receivedst. 
 
 he received. 
 
 we received. 
 
 you received. 
 
 they received. 
 
 Future. 
 
 Je recevrai, 
 Tu recevras, 
 II recevra, 
 Nous recevrons, 
 Vous recevrez, 
 lis recevrout, 
 
 1 shall receive. 
 thou wilt receive. 
 
 he will receive, 
 we shall receive, 
 you will receive, 
 they will receive. 
 
 Past Anterior. 
 J'eus re9u, I had received. 
 
 Tu eus re9u, 
 II eut re9u, 
 Nous eumes re9U, 
 Vous eutes re9U, 
 lis eurent re9u, 
 
 thou hadst received. 
 
 he had received. 
 
 we had received. 
 
 you had received. 
 
 they had received. 
 
 Future Anterior 
 J'aurai re9U, 
 Tu auras re9u, 
 11 aura re9u, 
 Nous aurons re9u, 
 Vous aurez re9u, 
 Us auront re9u, 
 
 I shall have] 
 thou wilt have ^ 
 he will have • S 
 we thall have > « 
 yo'i will have 
 they will have 
 
 CONDITIONAL MODE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Je recevrais, 
 Tu recevrais, 
 U recevrait, 
 Nous recevrions, 
 Vous recevriez, 
 Us recevraient, 
 
 I should receive. 
 
 thou wouldst receive. 
 
 he would receive. 
 
 we should receive. 
 
 you would receive. 
 
 they would receive. 
 
 Past. 
 J'aurais re9u, 
 Tu anrais re9u, 
 II aurait re9ti, 
 Nous aurions re9u, 
 Vous auriez re9u, 
 Us auraient 1-0911, 
 
 I Should} 55, 
 
 thou wouldst I I 
 
 he would 
 
 we should 
 
 you would J 
 
 they would) 
 
 \l 
 
 Re90is 
 
 IMPERATIVE MODE. 
 
 receive (thou), Recevons, 
 Recevez, 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. 
 
 Present. 
 Que je re9oive, 
 Que tu re9oives>, 
 Qu'il re9oive, 
 Que nous recevions, 
 Que vous receviez, 
 QuMls re9oivent, 
 
 iMPhRFECT. 
 
 Que je re9usse, 
 Que tu re9usses, 
 Qu'il re9iit, 
 Que nons ^nssions, 
 Que vous re9iissiez, 
 Qu*ils re9ussent, 
 
 that i"| 
 
 that thou I 
 
 that he \^ 
 
 that we j i 
 
 that you §• 
 
 that they J * 
 
 that 71 § 
 
 that thou I <§' 
 
 that he ■' - 
 
 that we<^ 
 
 that you \ |- 
 
 that they j * 
 
 let us receive, 
 receive {you). 
 
 that 1) 
 that thou 
 
 that he \ 
 that ue I" 
 that you 
 that they J 
 
 Past. 
 Que j'aie re9u, 
 Que tu aies re9U, 
 Que'il ait re9U, 
 Que nous ayons recti 
 Que vous ayez re9U, 
 Qu'il s aient re9u, 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 Que j'eusse re9n, that I~\ 
 
 Que tu cusses re9U, that thou 
 Qu'il eut re9u, that he • 
 
 Que nons enssions re9U, that we 
 Que vous eusslez rc^u, that you 
 Qu'ils eussent re9u, that they 
 
 3g 
 
 ^=§ 
 
164 
 
 THE VERB— VENDEE. 
 
 Conjugation of Vendre—to sett. 
 
 INFINITIVE MODE. 
 
 Present. 
 Vendre. to sell. 
 
 Past. 
 Avoir vendu, to have sold. 
 
 PARTICIPLES. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Vendant, selling. 
 
 past 
 Vendu, sold. 
 
 COMPOUND. 
 
 Ayant vendu, having sold. 
 
 INDICATIVE MODE. 
 
 
 Present. 
 
 Past Indef 
 
 inite. 
 
 Je vends, 
 
 I seU. 
 
 J'ai vendu, 
 
 I have sold. 
 
 Tu vends, 
 
 thou sellest. 
 
 Tu as vendu, 
 
 thou hast sold. 
 
 11 vend, 
 
 Tie s^ Us. 
 
 U a vendu, 
 
 he has sold. 
 
 Nous vendons, 
 
 we sell. 
 
 Nous avons vendu, 
 
 we have sold. 
 
 Vous vendez, 
 
 you sell. 
 
 Vous avez vendu, 
 
 you have sold. 
 
 lis vendent, 
 
 they sell. 
 
 Us ont vendu, 
 
 they have sold. 
 
 Imperfect. 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 
 Je vendais, 
 
 I was selling. 
 
 J'avais vendu, 
 
 1 had sold. 
 
 Tu vendais, 
 
 thou wast selling. 
 
 Tu avais vendu, 
 
 thou hadst sold. 
 
 11 vendait, 
 
 he ivas selling. 
 
 11 avait vendu. 
 
 he had sold. 
 
 Nous veudions, 
 
 we were selling. 
 
 Nous avions vendu, 
 
 ice had sold. 
 
 Vous vendiez, 
 
 you icere selling. 
 
 Vous aviez vendu. 
 
 you had sold. 
 
 Us vendaient, 
 
 they wen selling. 
 
 Us avaient vendu, 
 
 they had sold. 
 
 Past Definite. 
 
 Past Anterior. 
 
 Je vendis, 
 
 Isold. 
 
 J'eus vendu. 
 
 lhad sold. 
 
 Tu vendis, 
 
 thou soldest. 
 
 Tu ens vendu, 
 
 thou had-*t sold. 
 
 11 venclit, 
 
 he sold. 
 
 U eut vendu. 
 
 he had sold. 
 
 Nous ven dimes 
 
 , we sold. 
 
 Nous enmes vendu, 
 
 we had sold. 
 
 Vous vendites, 
 
 you sold. 
 
 Vous eiires vendu, 
 
 you had sold. 
 
 Us vendirent, 
 
 they sold. 
 
 Us eurent vendu, 
 
 they had sold. 
 
 
 Future. 
 
 Future Anterior. 
 
 Je vendrai, 
 
 I shall sell. 
 
 J'aurai vendu. 
 
 IshaW] 
 
 Tu vendras, 
 
 thou wilt sell. 
 
 Tu auras vendu, 
 
 thou wilt 1 |* 
 
 11 vendra. 
 
 he will sell. 
 
 II aura vendu, 
 
 he will | | 
 we shall < 5 
 
 Nous vendrons 
 
 we shall sell. 
 
 Nous aurons vendu 
 
 Vous vendrez, 
 
 yon will sell. 
 
 Vous aurez rendu, 
 
 you will J ?• 
 
 Us vendront, 
 
 they will sell. 
 
 lis ;iuront vendu, 
 
 they willi 
 
TEE VERB— PARTICIPLE— ADVERB. 
 
 165 
 
 CONDITIONAL MODE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Je vendrais, 
 Tu vendrais, 
 II vendrait, 
 Nous vendrions, 
 Vous vendriez, 
 lis vendraient, 
 
 1 should sell. 
 
 thou wouldst sell. 
 
 he would sell. 
 
 we should sell. 
 
 you would sell. 
 
 they would sell. 
 
 Past. 
 J'aurais vendu, 
 Tu aurais vendu, 
 II aurait vendu, 
 Nousaurions vendu, 
 Vous auriez vendu, 
 lis auraient vendu, 
 
 1 should } 
 
 thou wouldst I > 
 
 he would ! « 
 
 we should • § 
 
 you would S 
 
 they would) 
 
 Vends, 
 
 IMPERATIVE MODE. 
 
 Vendons, 
 sell (thou) Vendez, 
 
 let us sell, 
 sell (you). 
 
 SUBJUNCTIVE MODE. 
 
 Present. 
 
 Que je vende, that 1 may sell. 
 
 Que tu vendes, that thou mayst sell. 
 Qu'il vende, that he may sell. 
 
 Que nous vendions, that we may sell. 
 Que vous vendiez, that you may sell. 
 Qu'il? vendent, that they may sell. 
 
 Past. 
 
 Que j'aie vendu, that I may' 
 
 Que tu aies vendu, that thou mayst 
 Qu'il ait vendu, that he may 
 
 Que nous ayons vendu, that we may \ 
 Que vous ayez vendu, thatyoumay 
 Qu'ils aient vendu, that they may 
 
 
 Imperfect 
 
 
 
 Que je vendisse, 
 
 that T 
 
 
 Que tu vendisses, 
 
 that thou 
 
 1 
 
 Qu'il vendit, 
 
 that he 
 
 IS 
 
 Que nous vendissions, 
 
 that we 
 
 Que vous vendissiez, 
 
 that you 
 
 ' 
 
 Qu'ils vendissent, 
 
 that they, 
 
 
 Pluperfect. 
 Que j'eusse vendu, 
 Que tu eusses vendu, 
 Qu'il eut vendu, 
 Que nous eussions vendu, 
 Que vous eussiez vendu, 
 Qu'ils eussent vendu, 
 
 
 VI. TJie Participle, 
 
 The Participles are given with the verbs. 
 
 VII. TJie Adverb. 
 
 Ainsi, thus ; 
 alors, then ; 
 anjourd'hui, to-day 
 aussi, also, too ; 
 
 ensuite, then, afterwards ; 
 hier, yesterday ; 
 longtemps, long, a long time 
 maintenant, now ; 
 
166 
 
 THE AD VERB— PREPOSITION. 
 
 bien, well ; 
 bientot, soon ; 
 comme, as, like ; 
 comment, how ; 
 dedans, within ; 
 dehors, outside ; 
 deja, already ; 
 demain, to-morrow ; 
 encore, still ; yet ; 
 ensemble, together ; 
 
 mal, badly ; 
 
 partout, everywhere ; 
 
 quand, when ; 
 
 presque, almost ; 
 
 si, so ; 
 
 souvent, often ; 
 
 surtout, especially ; 
 
 tantot, by and by; a little while age 
 
 tard, late ; 
 
 toujours, always. 
 
 Assez, enough ; moins, less ; 
 
 autant, as much ; as many ; P eu j little ; a few ; 
 
 beaucoup, much, many ; plus, more ; 
 
 combien, how much, how many ; trop, too ; too much. 
 
 Doucement, softly, gently ; 
 heureusementj fortunately; 
 
 lentement, slowly 
 poliment, politely. 
 
 Tres, very ; 
 fort, hard ; very ; 
 
 bien, well, very ; 
 assez, enough ; rather. 
 
 VIII. TJie Preposition. 
 
 Avant, before ; hors, out ; 
 
 contre, against ; jusque, till, until ; as far as 
 
 depuis, since ; parmi, among ; 
 
 derriere, behind ; pendant, during ; 
 
 devant, before ; pres de, near ; 
 
 entre, between ; sous, under ; 
 
 environ, about ; sur, on, upon ; 
 
 excepte, except ; vis a vis, opposite. 
 
 
THE CONJUNCTION— INTERJECTION. 
 
 167 
 
 IX. TJie Conjunction, 
 
 Aussitot que, as soon as ; 
 
 ni, neither ; nor ; 
 
 avant que, before ; 
 
 
 ou, or ; 
 
 car, for ; 
 
 
 parce que, because j 
 
 cependant, however 
 
 
 pourquoi. why ; 
 
 et, and ; 
 
 
 que, that ; 
 
 lorsque, when ; 
 
 
 quoique, although ; 
 
 mais, but ; 
 
 
 si, if ; whether. 
 
 
 X. 
 
 The Interjection, 
 
 Ah ! ah ! 
 
 
 bah ! pshaw ! 
 
 aiie ! oh ! 
 
 
 paix ! silence t 
 
 helas ! alas 1 
 
 
 chut ! hist ! 
 
 fi! fy! 
 
 
 hola ! hallo ! 
 
 oh! oh! 
 
 
 eh bien ! well then I 
 


 LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 
 
 Hi 
 
 iM 
 
 Yen \ m IHi WKMm 
 
 ■ 
 
 | 
 
 m 
 
 
 -.-'. 
 
 ■